JP2018068770A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To preferably control a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine can control a state to an advantageous state advantageous to a player. The game machine comprises: first control means; second control means capable of communicating with the first control means; performance state control means capable of controlling a performance state in the advantageous state to any out of plural kinds of performance states; and notification performance means capable of executing a notification performance related to a number of game media applied in the advantageous state. The notification performance means executes the notification performance in the first notification mode when the state is controlled to the first performance state by the performance state control means, and executes the notification performance in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, when the state is controlled to the second performance state different from the first performance state by the performance state control means, and the first control means supplies continuously, a specific signal to the second control means over a prescribed period when a period in which the first control means cannot perform prescribed communication with the second control means, exceeds a specific period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs a game.

  For example, Patent Literature 1 includes a game including first control means (here, sub-integrated board 1740) and second control means (here, liquid crystal control board 1750) that can communicate with the first control means. A machine is disclosed.

JP 2014-138774 A

  In Patent Document 1, the gaming machine may not be controlled appropriately.

  An object of this invention is to provide the gaming machine which can control a gaming machine suitably.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
First control means (for example, the first effect control board 12, the effect control board 12, etc.);
Second control means capable of communicating with the first control means (for example, the display control unit 31 of the second effect control board 30 and the VDP 123 of the effect control board 12);
An effect state control means (for example, an effect state control means (for example, an effect state during a round) in the advantageous state can be controlled to any one of a plurality of effect states (for example, an A mode or a B mode in FIG. 54). , CPU 120 for production control)
A notification effect (for example, a notification effect by the first notification image 204 or the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 54) related to the number of game media (for example, the number of game balls) given during the advantageous state is executed. Notification production means (eg, CPU 120 for production control);
With
The notification production means is
When the production state control means controls the first production state (for example, A mode), the notification production according to the first notification mode (for example, the first notification image 204 shown in FIG. 54) is executed.
When the production state control means is controlling the second production state (for example, B mode) different from the first production state, a second notification mode (for example, FIG. 54) different from the first notification mode. The notification effect by the second notification image 214 or the like shown),
The first control means includes
When a period during which predetermined communication with the second control means cannot be performed (for example, a period during which a rising signal cannot be received) exceeds a specific period (for example, 10 seconds), a specific signal ( For example, a reset signal or the like is continuously supplied over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can be suitably controlled.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When the specific signal is continuously supplied to the second control means over a predetermined period,
Restricting the execution of the notification effect by the notification effect means;
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can be suitably controlled.

(3) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like)
First control means (for example, the first effect control board 12),
Second control means capable of communicating with the first control means (for example, VDP of the display control unit 31)
And comprising
The first control unit performs the second control when a period during which predetermined communication with the second control unit cannot be performed (for example, a period during which a rising signal cannot be received) exceeds a specific period (for example, 10 seconds). A specific signal (for example, a reset signal) is continuously supplied to the means over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The first control unit supplies the specific signal to the second control unit a plurality of times at predetermined intervals (for example, a reset signal having a time width of 1 ms or less is supplied a plurality of times at 1 ms intervals).
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
When the second control means runs out of heat, a period during which the predetermined communication cannot be performed exceeds the specific period.
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
The specific signal is a reset signal;
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
The apparatus further includes a cooling unit (for example, a cooling fan 40) that cools the second control unit during the predetermined period.
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A cooling means (for example, a cooling fan 40) for cooling the second control means;
The cooling means cools the second control means more strongly in the predetermined period than in a period other than the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 41, etc.)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

(9) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (8),
Variable display means for executing variable display (for example, the image display device 5);
Adjustment means (for example, the first effect control board 12 or the like) capable of adjusting the effect setting according to an adjustment operation (for example, volume adjustment or the like) by the player at least during execution of variable display;
Adjustment image display means (for example, the first effect control board 12) that displays an adjustment image (for example, the volume image VL) corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period,
The adjusted image display means makes the adjusted image unrecognizable or difficult to view in a period in which the variable display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 40).
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a decrease in recognizability of the variable display result.

(10) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (9),
The first control means transmits a command (for example, a first effect control command),
The second control means receives the command transmitted by the first control means, performs control according to the received command,
The first control means can transmit the command to be transmitted with predetermined information (for example, a checksum) for confirming the consistency of the command to be transmitted,
The second control means can determine the consistency of a command accompanied by the predetermined information based on the predetermined information (for example, the process of step S74).
The first control means transmits the predetermined information along with only a part of specific commands (for example, refer to the specific command in FIG. 4) among the plurality of types of commands that can be transmitted.
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, the processing burden on the first control means and the second control means can be reduced.

(11) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An effect state control means (for example, an effect state control means (for example, an effect state during a round, etc.) in the advantageous state can be controlled to any one of a plurality of kinds of effect states (for example, A mode or B mode in FIG. 38). , CPU 120 for production control)
A notification effect (for example, a notification effect by the first notification image 204 or the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 38) related to the number of game media (for example, the number of game balls) given during the advantageous state is executed. Notification production means (for example, production control CPU 120, etc.),
The notification production means is
When the production state control means is controlling the first production state (for example, A mode), the notification production according to the first notification mode (for example, the first notification image 204 shown in FIG. 38) is executed.
When the production state control means controls the second production state (for example, the B mode or the like) different from the first production state, a second notification mode (for example, FIG. 38) different from the first notification mode. The notification effect by the second notification image 214 shown) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by the notification effect according to the effect state.

(12) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
The notification effect means indicates that the number of game media granted during the advantageous state has reached a predetermined number (for example, the total number of game balls acquired exceeds n times 500 as shown in step S1941 in FIG. 41). The notification effect according to the first notification mode (for example, the first notification image 204 shown in FIG. 38) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by diversifying the notification effects.

(13) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above,
The notification effect means indicates that the number of game media provided during the advantageous state has become a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, the total number of acquired game balls is 2500 as shown in step S1943 in FIG. 41). The notification effect according to the second notification mode (for example, the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 38) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by diversifying the notification effects.

(14) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
Advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that controls to the advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (for example, jackpot display result) )When,
In the advantageous state, a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can win, and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to win or cannot win. ) Variable means (for example, special variable winning ball apparatus 7),
Each time a game medium wins the variable means, the number of game media displayed can be variably displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the total number display image 205 in the A mode in FIG. 38, the B mode). Acquisition total number display image 215, step S1933 of FIG. 40, and the like.

  According to such a configuration, since the number of assigned game media can be variably displayed, the interest of the game in the advantageous state can be improved.

(15) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (14) above,
In the advantageous state, effect state selection means (for example, FIG. 38) for selecting whether to set the first effect state (for example, A mode) or the second effect state (for example, B mode). Mode selection image 210, the process of step S1925 of FIG. 40, and the like.

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to select a production state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

(16) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (15) above,
The advantageous state control means is configured to change the variable means (for example, until a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses) or at least one of winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game media is established. , A special variable winning ball apparatus, etc.) can be controlled to the advantageous state in which a unit game that can be changed to the first state (for example, an open state) is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, 15 times),
The notification effect means is given when a special number (for example, 11th or 12th) of game media is won in one unit game (for example, an overwinning occurs). The notification effect is executed after the number of game media to be added is added (for example, a process of adding a prize ball in an over win in the process of steps S1930 to S1932 in FIG. 40).

  According to such a configuration, since the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game media given in a single unit game, the number of game media awarded more than the specified number, it is appropriate for the player. It is possible to execute a notification effect.

(17) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (16) above,
Notification mode determination means (for example, for effect control) that determines the notification effect mode to one of a plurality of types of notification modes (for example, notification with white characters, notification with rainbow characters, etc. shown in the modification). CPU 120, etc.)
A variable storage that has not yet been started, and further includes a storage unit for storing the display as a storage (for example, a storage buffer).
The notification mode determination means determines the notification mode based on the fact that a variable display that is the specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result or the like) is stored in the reserved storage during the advantageous state ( For example, as shown in the modified example, based on the fact that there is a reserved memory that is a jackpot display result in the reserved memory buffer during the big hit, the notification effect is changed to a rainbow character).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine the notification mode of the notification effect based on the fact that the variable display that is the specific display result is stored in the hold memory, and to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state Can do.

(18) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (17) above,
The advantageous state control means includes, as the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state (for example, a normal big hit, which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state) Can be controlled to a big hit gaming state based on
Based on the fact that in one unit game in the first advantageous state, the game medium has won the special number (for example, the 11th or 12th) more than the specified number (for example, an over-winning has occurred). The notification effect in a special mode (for example, the notification effect in a mode in which the first grand prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in the second embodiment). Can be executed (for example, the processing of step S3923 and step S3924 in the CPU 120 for effect control shown in FIG. 43).

  According to such a configuration, by executing the notification effect in the special mode based on the fact that the game medium has won a special number larger than the specified number in one unit game in the first advantageous state, Interest can be improved.

(19) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (18) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the second big prize opening) provided in the variable means in the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a probability change state). It further includes special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100).
After the game medium passes through the specific area in the advantageous state, the game medium has won the special number (for example, the eleventh and twelfth) more than the prescribed number in one unit game in the advantageous state. Based on (for example, the occurrence of over-winning), the notification effect in a special manner (for example, as shown in the second embodiment, the first grand prize opening LED 20c is rainbow-lighted and predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R). For example, the processing of steps S3923 and S3924 in the CPU 120 for effect control shown in FIG. 43).

  According to such a configuration, after the game medium passes through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is executed based on the fact that the game medium has won a special number larger than the prescribed number in one unit game in the advantageous state. By this, the interest of the game by notification production can be improved.

It is a front view showing an example of a pachinko gaming machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram for demonstrating an example of the command and signal transmitted / received by the main board | substrate in 1st Embodiment, a 1st effect control board, and a 2nd effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main 1st production control commands in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the 2nd production control command in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the various signals transmitted to the 1st effect control board from the 2nd effect control board in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement monitoring (supply timing of a reset signal) of the 2nd effect control board by the 1st effect control board in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the long reset in 1st Embodiment, or a short reset. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process process in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of the random number value determination process at the time of winning in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal process in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of the special figure display result determination table in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of the jackpot classification determination table in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of the fluctuation pattern in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the variation pattern determination table for jackpots in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the variation pattern determination table for a loss in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the process during big hit release in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit end process in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st production control main process in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st effect control command analysis etc. processing in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd production control main process in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processes, such as the 2nd production control command analysis in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the processing content performed in processes (step S787), such as the 1st production control command analysis in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the command buffer at the time of a start winning prize in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control process process in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prefetch notice setting process in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of execution determination of the prefetch chance in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of execution decision of the 1st reservation change effect and the 2nd reservation change effect in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the cancellation decision of the 1st pending | holding change effect in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display process in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation screen in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation screen in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation screen in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation screen in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold display effect in 1st Embodiment. It is an example of the production | presentation screen at the time of the volume change in 1st Embodiment. It is an example of the intensity | strength change of the cooling fan in 1st Embodiment. It is an example of the aspect of the long reset which concerns on a modification. It is a front view which shows an example of the pachinko game machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit classification table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board | substrate (game control board) in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of each random number in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the jackpot determination table and jackpot classification determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table used in order to determine the fluctuation pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control process process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the alerting | reporting effect in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in round in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in round in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the post-round process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the post-round process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the post-round process in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the alerting | reporting effect in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the alerting | reporting effect in 3rd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. These consist of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  Note that “variable display” of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are changed (displayed in a variable manner) by update display or the like (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (variable display result) (also referred to as a derivation display) (the same applies to other variable displays described later). Note that scroll display, deformation, enlargement / reduction, and the like may be performed as variations in symbols (in particular, decorative symbols described later).

  In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is "second special symbol". Also called. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numerals) that are different from the special symbols can be changed. Display is performed. As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are synchronized with the first special game or the second special game. , Variable display of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display or update display) is performed.

Display areas 5Ha and 5Hb are also arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 1). In the display area 5Ha, a first reserved display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the first special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) whose execution is suspended is displayed right-justified. In the display area 5Hb, a second reserved display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the second special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) for which execution is suspended is displayed left-justified.

  Note that the number of special figure games held is also referred to as a special figure holding memory number. In particular, the number of holds of the first special figure game is referred to as a first special figure hold memory number. The number of holds of the second special figure game is referred to as the second special figure hold memory number. The number of first reserved display images indicates the first special figure reserved memory number, and the number of second reserved display images indicates the second special figure reserved memory number. The first hold display image and the second hold display image may be collectively referred to as a hold display image.

  When the held first special figure game is executed (digested), the first held display image displayed in the display area 5Ha is shifted to the right, and the rightmost first reserved display image (digested first image) is displayed. The image corresponding to one special figure game) is deleted. When the held second special figure game is executed (digested), the second reserved display image displayed in the display area 5Hb shifts to the left, and the leftmost second reserved display image (the digested first 2) The image corresponding to the special figure game is deleted.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B includes a plurality of LEDs, and displays the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number depending on the number of LEDs lit. To do.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, the first start port switch 22A (see FIG. 2) is turned on, thereby detecting the entry of the game ball (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three) ), The first special figure game can be started or put on hold.)

  The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type hand having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2) for a normal electric accessory. The object (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and the second start winning opening is formed. In the normal variable winning ball device 6B, for example, when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece comes close to the normal winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning prize is obtained. The game ball enters a closed state where the game ball does not enter the mouth (the second start winning port is also referred to as a closed state). On the other hand, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening by moving the movable wing piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second ball). It is also said that the start winning opening is opened.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, the second start port switch 22B (see FIG. 2) is turned on, thereby detecting the entry of the game ball (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three) ) And the execution of the second special figure game can be started or put on hold.)

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) that is used for the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as an area.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) is turned on, and thereby the entry of the game ball is detected. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when game balls enter the grand prize winning opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and can display variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also called “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”) as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbols. Do. Such variable display of normal symbols is also referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  The usual game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the gate switch 21 of FIG. 2 is turned on, and thereby the passage of the game ball is detected.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound such as sound effects are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided around the game area. Is provided. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  In the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like for launching a game ball as a game medium toward a game area by a hitting ball launching device is provided. Yes.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, a first effect control board 12, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and a second effect control board 30 as shown in FIG. Etc. are installed. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and functions to control the progress of the game (execution of special game, normal game, etc.) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (first effect toward the first effect control board 12). A control command (including a function of transmitting a control command (FIG. 4, etc., which will be described in detail later)) The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  As an example, the CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to realize the function of the main board 11 (control of the progress of the game). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns (such as FIG. 17; details will be described later), data indicating various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which a detection signal (described later) supplied from the switch circuit 110 is input, and various signals (a first effect control command, a solenoid drive signal described later, and various display devices) by processing by the CPU 103. 4A, 4B, 20 or signals for driving the hold indicators 25A to 25C) are output to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100.

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game media pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The first effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 toward the first effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

  The first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30 both execute and control the effects, but are independent of each other and are sub-side control boards independent of the main board 11. . The first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30 cooperate to produce an effect based on the first effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the first effect control board 12 via the relay board 15. Has the function to execute. As described later, in this embodiment, the second effect control board 30 (particularly, a display control unit 31 described later) controls the effect control. The first effect control board 12 performs control of the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 based on a command from the second effect control board 30. The display of the effect screen on the image display device 5 is controlled by the second effect control board 30.

  On the first effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, and an I / O 125 are mounted. The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, the RAM 122, and the I / O 125 may be configured as a one-chip microcomputer.

  As an example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for realizing the above-described functions and the like of the first effect control board 12. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (for example, pattern data for controlling the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The I / O 125 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (a first effect control command, various signals from the second effect control board 30 (see FIG. 6, will be described later in detail)) and an effect control CPU 120 are input. Various signals (second effect control command (refer to FIG. 5, will be described in detail later), electrical signal to be described later, audio signal to be described later, cooling fan drive signal to be described later, reset signal (see FIG. 8 and the like). ) And the like) are output to the outside of the first effect control board 12.

  A display control unit 31 is mounted on the second effect control board 30. The display control unit 31 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like.

  The display control unit 31 (here, VDP) performs processing for realizing the above functions and the like of the second effect control board 30. In this embodiment, the display control unit 31 determines the execution mode of various effects (including the presence / absence of execution of various effects) (for example, performs processing based on the second effect control command). A process for executing an effect in the determined execution mode (a process for controlling an effect operation by an electrical component for effect (image display device 5), commands for controlling the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9) Including processing to transmit to the control board 12).

  When controlling the effect operation by the image display device 5, the display control unit 31 (here, VDP) generates a video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 5 based on the image data stored in the CGROM. Are output to the image display device 5, and the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect image may have, for example, a plurality of layer structures (for example, a background image is displayed on the first layer, a reserved storage display is displayed on the second layer, and a decorative pattern is displayed on the third layer. In this case, image data is prepared for each layer, and the effect data is displayed based on the image data for each layer. A video signal (a video signal representing a combination of images of each image data) may be generated and output.

  The CGROM included in the display control unit 31 includes a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for determining the execution mode of the effect and controlling the effect operation, in addition to the image data for generating the video signal of the effect image. The table data that constitutes, the pattern data that constitutes various effect control patterns (details will be described later), and the like are stored. Note that data other than image data such as table data and pattern data may be stored in a storage unit (provided as part of the display control unit 31) other than CGROM. The VRAM is used for developing normal image data, but may be used as a main memory for temporarily storing data other than image data. Alternatively, a main memory (such as a RAM) that temporarily stores data other than image data may be prepared as a part of the display control unit 31 separately from the VRAM.

  The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects, for example, effect control execution data (display control) associated with a determination value such as a process timer determination value. Data, voice control data, lighting data, etc.) and process data including an end code, etc., which are configured by combining the pattern data and set as a usage pattern described later. In addition, pattern data that directly becomes an effect control pattern is also stored, and the pattern data may be set as an effect control pattern that becomes a use pattern as it is. The voice control data and the lighting control data may be data specifying a command (voice command or lamp command described later, see FIG. 6) to be transmitted to the first effect control board 12, for example. The display control data is data specifying image data of an image to be displayed (the display control unit 31 generates and outputs a video signal using the image data specified by the display control data).

  The display control unit 31 further includes, for example, a random number circuit and the like, and numerical values indicating various random number values used for controlling the rendering operation (for the process of determining the execution mode of the rendering) by the random number circuit. Data is counted updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. The effect random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit as in the case of the game random number used on the main board 11, or the software may be executed by the VDP executing a predetermined computer program. It may be updated.

  The display control unit 31 exchanges signals (second effect control command, reset signal, various signals in FIG. 6 and the like) with the first effect control board 12 according to the progress of the process, and displays an image signal described later as an image. An I / O for outputting to the device 5 is also provided. Since the reset signal is input from the first effect control board 12 to the VDP of the display control unit 31 as will be described later, the reset signal is not directly passed from the first effect control board 12 to the VDP. It may be entered.

  At least a part of the display control unit 31 may be configured as a one-chip processor. For example, the display control unit 31 may be formed by VDP including at least one of CGROM and VRAM.

  The sound control board 13 has a function of outputting sound (sound specified by the sound signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound signal from the first effect control board 12.

  The lamp control board 14 has a function of turning on / off the game effect lamp 9 (turning on / off according to the drive content indicated by the electrical decoration signal) based on the electrical decoration signal from the first effect control board 12.

  The image display device 5 includes a display panel including a liquid crystal panel, an EL panel, and a driver circuit that drives the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 31 to the image display device 5 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays an image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images and the like are displayed on the image display device 5.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a cooling fan 40. The cooling FAN 40 blows air to a portion of the second effect control board 30 that generates heat, such as the display control unit 31 (particularly, VDP). The cooling FAN 40 operates when a cooling fan drive signal output from the first effect control board 12 (I / O 125) is supplied as necessary, and cools the target portion by blowing air.

(Progress of games, progress of production, etc.)
A game medium (game ball) is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game (variable display of normal symbols) is started. In addition, when another general game is already running, or when the normal game cannot be started (such as when the start condition is not satisfied), such as during the following opening control, the maximum number of games is limited to 4 Execution is deferred. The held ordinary game is executed when a start condition for starting the ordinary game is satisfied (for example, no other ordinary game is being executed and no release control is being performed). If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when the number of usual reserved memories reaches the upper limit, the number of ordinary reserved memories does not increase and the passage is invalidated.

  The variable display results that are stopped and displayed in the ordinary game include a symbol per symbol (for example, a common symbol such as “7”) and a common symbol losing symbol (for example, a common symbol such as “−”). . When the symbol per symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result is “per symbol”. The case where the usual figure losing symbol is stopped (derived) is when the variable display result is “general figure losing”.

  In the case of “per normal”, an opening control (the second start winning opening is opened) is performed in which the movable blade piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted for a predetermined period.

  When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the first special game is started. Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the second special game is started. When the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already being executed or the game is controlled to the big hit game state described later, each of the four special figure games is four. Execution of the special figure game is suspended with the above as an upper limit. The reserved special figure game is executed when a start condition capable of starting the special figure game is satisfied (for example, no other special figure game is currently being executed and is not in the big hit game state). When the game ball enters the first start winning opening when the first special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit value, the first special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be a prize ball). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening when the second special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit value, the second special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be a prize ball). The entry (winning) of a game ball that increases the number of first special figure reserved memories into the first starting winning opening is also referred to as a first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the game ball that increases the second special figure reserved memory number into the second starting winning opening is also referred to as a second starting winning. These winnings are collectively referred to simply as starting winnings.

  The variable display results that are stopped and displayed in the special figure game include jackpot symbols (eg, special symbols such as “2”, “4”, “5”, “7”), and lost symbols (eg, “-”). Special figure). When the jackpot symbol is stopped (displayed), the variable display result is “big jackpot”. The lost symbol is stopped (derived) when the variable display result is “lost”.

  When the variable display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is “big hit” (specific display result), the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the variable display result is “losing”, it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in an open state. In the open state, a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and a predetermined number (for example, 9) of the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening (the number of game balls for which a winning is detected by the count switch 23). It continues until the timing until it reaches or the earlier timing. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply called “round”). In the big hit game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15 times”) is reached (in the period other than the round game, the big prize opening is closed). Thereby, a lot of prize balls are paid out in the big hit gaming state.

  Big hit types such as “non-probability variation A”, “non-probability variation B”, “probability variation A”, and “probability variation B” are set in “big hit”. When the big hit type is “non-probability variation A”, “2” is derived, “4” when “non-probability variation B”, “5” when “probability variation A”, and “7” when “probability variation B”. The In this embodiment, the mode of the big hit gaming state (the number of round games, the predetermined period, etc.) does not change according to the big hit type, but the type may be changed according to the big hit type.

  Note that when the jackpot type is “non-probability variation A”, “non-probability variation B”, “probability variation A”, or “probability variation B”, the “big probability” is “non-probability variation A big hit”, “non-probability variation B big hit”, respectively. There are also “probability A big hit” and “probability B big hit”. In addition, the jackpot gaming state based on “non-probability variation A big hit”, “non-probability variation B big hit”, “probability variation B big hit”, “probability variation B big hit”, respectively, “Game state”, “Probability change A big hit game state”, “Probability change B big hit game state”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit probability) may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability is higher than the normal state. The probability change state continues until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied.

  In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time (variable display period) may be controlled to be short when the normal state is shorter. In the short-time state, one of the short-time end conditions is a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 50 times or 100 times) that the special game is executed and the next big hit game state is started. Continue until established earlier. In addition, the remaining number of executions of the special figure game until the time-shutdown condition is satisfied may be referred to as a time-shortest number of times.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state after the non-probability variation A big hit gaming state or the non-probability variation B big hit gaming state is a short time state, but does not become a certain variation state. The gaming state after the probability variation A big hit gaming state or the probability variation B big hit gaming state is finished is a short time state and a probability varying state. The initial value of the remaining time in the short-time state after the non-probabilistic A big hit gaming state and the probabilistic A big hit gaming state is 50 times, and the short-time state after the non-probable B big hit gaming state and the probable B big hit gaming state The initial value of the number of remaining hours is 100. In addition, it can be said that the short-time state and the probability variation state are advantageous game states for the player.

  In the short-time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is opened and closed in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening as compared to the non-short-time state that is not in the short-time state such as the normal state. And change. For example, the control to make the change time of the normal symbol in the normal game (the variable display period of the normal figure, also referred to as the normal change time) shorter than in the normal state, or variable display in each normal game What is necessary is just to change the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by controlling the probability that the result is “per hit” as compared with the normal state. Such control is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time reduction control” or “high base control”). By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a gaming state other than a state advantageous for a player such as a short-time state, a probability variation state, etc. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of “winning” and the probability that the variable display result in the special game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) The state is controlled in the same manner as when a predetermined return process is not executed after the input.

  The short time state is also referred to as “high base”, and the gaming state that is not in the short time state is also referred to as “low base” or “non-short time state”. The probability variation state is also referred to as “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability”, “non-probability variation”, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, this corresponds to the start of the first special game or the second special game. Then, variable display of decorative symbols (this is also a kind of effect) is started. When the variable display result (also referred to as a confirmed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the fixed decorative pattern (3) which becomes the display result (variable display result) of the variable symbol variable display A combination of two decorative symbols) is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design (“reach variation” that is not yet stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination described later. "Design" is also a display mode in which fluctuation continues.

  Further, in this embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display. Normal reach, super reach A (development from normal reach), and super reach B (development from normal reach) are prepared as reach productions. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach.

  The big hit expectation is, for example, the ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, and is also the ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “big hit”.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, so-called prefetching is performed based on the determination at the time of starting winning (determination regarding variable display of a reserved special game or a decorative symbol, hereinafter also referred to as prefetch determination). A notice is executed. The prefetch notice is a notice of the jackpot expectation of a special figure game (hereinafter also referred to as a target) that is a target of the prefetch determination. In this embodiment, pre-reading chance notices (also simply referred to as pre-reading chance eyes), a first hold change effect, and a second hold change effect are prepared as prefetch notices.

  The pre-reading chance eye preview is a predetermined chance item (variable) as a variable display result of variable display of decorative symbols executed before the target (or multiple variable displays when multiple variable displays are executed). This is an effect of deriving and displaying a non-reach chance when the reach is not achieved in the display or a reach chance when the reach is established in the variable display (see FIG. 35).

  The first pending change effect temporarily stops a predetermined combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol in the variable display of decorative symbols executed before the target (finally, the symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol). In addition, this is an effect of changing the display mode (here, the display color, usually white) of the hold display image corresponding to the target special game (see FIG. 36).

  The temporary stop is also referred to as a temporary stop display. For example, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the display of the fixed decorative design that is the variable display result, the speed of change of the decorative design Is “0”, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a display state in which slight shaking or expansion / contraction is caused (that is, a state where one variable display is not completed). In such a display state, although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction. On the other hand, stop display (derived display) of the variable display result means that the variable display is ended by completely or finally stopping the identification information such as the decorative symbol.

  The second hold change effect is an effect of changing the display mode (here, the display color) of the hold display image corresponding to the target special game without displaying the special symbol.

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, various effects are performed in addition to the above effects. In addition, the variable display of the decorative design is a kind of production.

  When the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “big hit”, on the screen of the image display device 5, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol. As an example, the same decorative design (for example, any of “4” to “7”) is provided on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary that the fixed decorative symbols that become the jackpot combination are derived and displayed by stopping and displaying all together. Note that the decorative symbols to be stopped may be different depending on the type of jackpot (for example, “5” for “probability variation A”, “7” for “probability variation B”, “non-probability variation A”. "4" for "," 6 "for non-probability B, etc.).

  In this embodiment, an effect corresponding to the big hit gaming state is performed even during the big hit gaming state.

  When the special symbol variable display result is “losing”, the decorative symbol variable display mode is not the reach mode, and the decorative symbol composing a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped as the variable symbol display result. By being displayed, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination may be derived and displayed. In addition, when the special symbol variable display result is “losing”, as a decorative symbol variable display result, after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination (“reach loss” When the decorative symbols constituting the “combination” are stopped and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination may be derived and displayed.

(Explanation of operations of the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30)
As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 transmits a first effect control command to the first effect control board 12 as the game progresses. The first effect control command is, for example, a command as shown in FIG. 4 (details will be described later), and is a command for designating or notifying the progress of the game. The first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30 execute effects in accordance with the progress of the game based on the first effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. As a result, the progress of the game controlled by the main board 11 and the various effects executed by the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30 are synchronized.

  Here, the first effect control command will be described. FIG. 4 shows main first effect control commands. The following “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The first effect control command is relayed by the relay board 15. Each of the first effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (upper bit) indicates MODE (command type (classification)), and the second byte (lower bit) indicates EXT (details of the command). Content). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance. In other words, the possible values differ between the upper and lower bits.

  Command 8000 (H) is a first variation start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the first special figure game, that is, the start of variable display (fluctuation) of the first special figure. The command 8001 (H) is a second change start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the second special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display (fluctuation) of the second special figure. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command. Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special figure or variable display of the second special figure may be included in a later-described variation pattern designation command. The command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

  The command 81XX (H) is a variable display of special symbols (special game), a variable pattern of variable display of special symbols (execution time of special display or variable display of special symbols (special symbol variable time), or variable of decorative symbols. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating (notifying) a display pattern. In the “XX” of the command, a numerical value corresponding to each variation pattern (see FIG. 15, details will be described later) is set (for example, “00” for the variation pattern PA1-1). Further, the variation pattern designation command may be a command for designating the variation start of the decorative symbol. The command is transmitted when the special figure game is started.

  The command 8CXX (H) is a display result designation command for designating (notifying) whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type (that is, a variable display result). A numerical value corresponding to the display result is set in “XX” of the command (for example, “00” for “losing”, “01” for “probability A big hit”, etc.). The command is transmitted when the special figure game is started.

  The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol determination designation command for designating (notifying) the end of the special figure game (that is, deriving and displaying the variable display result). The symbol confirmation designation command is for designating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. This command is transmitted at the end of the special figure game.

  Command 95XX (H) is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state. A numerical value corresponding to the gaming state is set in “XX” in the command (for example, “00” in the normal state, “01” in the high-accuracy base state, etc.). The gaming state designation command is transmitted at a timing when the gaming state can be changed (at the end of jackpot, when a variable display result is derived, etc.), at the start of a special figure game, or the like. Note that the background of the effect screen displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed according to the gaming state. In this case, the gaming state designation command may be a background designation command for designating the background.

  The command A000 (H) is a hit start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the big hit gaming state (also the start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect executed at the start of the big hit gaming state, such as an effect for notifying that the big hit gaming state has been reached. This command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

  Command A3XX (H) is a hit end designation command for designating (notifying) the end of the big hit gaming state (which is also the start of ending). Ending is an effect executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, such as an effect for notifying that the jackpot gaming state is ended. “XX” in the command is set to a value for specifying the number of time reductions (initial value of the remaining number of time reductions) according to the jackpot type (for example, “non-probability variation A” or “probability variation A”) “00” is set for (time reduction number = 50 times), and “01” is set for “non-probability variation B” or “probability variation B” (time reduction number = 100 times). The “XX” may be a numerical value of the number of time reductions. This command is sent at the end of the last round game.

  Command B100 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating (notifying) that a first start winning has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the first starting winning opening. Command B200 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating (notifying) that a second start winning has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the second start winning opening. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command. The start winning designation command is transmitted when a start winning is generated (at the start winning).

  Command C000 (H) is a first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command for designating (notifying) that the first start winning is generated and the first special figure reserved memory number is increased by one. The command C100 (H) is a second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command for designating (notifying) that the second start winning is generated and the second special figure reserved memory number is increased by one. These commands may be collectively referred to as a special figure reserved memory number addition designation command. The special figure reserved memory number addition designation command is transmitted when a start prize is generated (at the start prize).

  Command C200 (H) is a first special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command for designating (notifying) that the first special figure reserved memory number is decreased by one when the first special figure game is executed. . The command C300 (H) is a second special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command for designating (notifying) that the second special figure reserved memory number is decreased by one when the second special figure game is executed. These commands may be collectively referred to as special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation commands. The special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is transmitted when the special figure game is started.

  The command C4XX (H) is a first winning determination result designation command for designating (notifying) the determination result of the pre-reading determination (details will be described later) at the occurrence of the first start winning or the absence of pre-reading determination (no determination). is there. The command C5XX (H) is a second prize determination result designation command for designating (notifying) the determination result of the pre-reading determination (details will be described later) at the time of occurrence of the second start winning or the absence of the pre-reading determination (no determination). is there. These commands may be collectively referred to as winning determination result designation commands. Note that the prefetch determination is a determination performed in a winning random number determination process in step S211 described later. The determination result of the prefetch determination (also referred to as a winning determination result) is set to “XX” in the winning determination result designation command (details will be described later). The command is transmitted when a start prize is generated (at the start prize). Whether or not to perform a pre-reading notice is determined on the second effect control board 30 side according to the contents of the winning determination result designation command (details will be described later).

  Command C600 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating display of a demonstration screen. This command is transmitted when the special game is not executed.

  When receiving the first effect control command, the first effect control board 12 generates a second effect control command based on the received first effect control command, and uses the generated second effect control command as the second effect control. It transmits to the board | substrate 30 (refer FIG. 3).

  Here, the second effect control command has a header and a footer as shown in FIG. A first effect control command is set in the header. The footer is set with data indicating the remaining number of time reductions (the number of executions of the special figure game that can be executed before the time reduction state ends). The number of remaining times is counted by the first effect control board 12. For example, a counter provided in the RAM 122 may be updated each time variable display is executed, thereby counting the remaining time. When not in the time saving state, the data is data indicating “0 times” (“0000 (H)”). In this embodiment, both the header and the footer have a 2-byte configuration (the second presentation control command has a total of 4 bytes).

  The first effect control board 12 transmits the second effect control command as described above to the second effect control board 30, but the first effect control command (set in the header) included in the transmitted second effect control command. When the first effect control command is a specific command, a checksum is calculated for the second effect control command, and the calculated checksum is transmitted along with the second effect control command. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a variation pattern designation command, a hit start designation command, a hit end designation command, and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (see FIG. 4). If the header of the second effect control command to be transmitted is one of the four commands, the first effect control board 12 calculates and accompanies the checksum (which confirms command consistency). For example, the checksum is obtained by adding each bit of data constituting the second effect control command and setting the leading bit to “0” (for example, adding 7F (H) to set the leading bit to “0”. (Ignore digit overflow.)

  In addition, the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30 also exchange signals (see FIG. 3). The second effect control board 30 transmits various signals shown in FIG. The first effect control board 12 transmits a reset signal.

  Various signals transmitted from the second effect control board 30 to the first effect control board 12 include a command reception signal, a voice command, a lamp command, a normal operation signal, a rising signal, and the like (FIG. 6). In this embodiment, each of these signals is transmitted as an information signal indicating 4-byte data in the same manner as the second effect control command.

  The command reception signal is a signal that is transmitted to the first effect control board 12 when the second effect control board 30 receives the second effect control command accompanied by the checksum. For example, when the second effect control command is accompanied by a checksum, the second effect control board 30 calculates the checksum for the second effect control command in the same manner as the first effect control board 12 and calculates this time. The checksum that has been added is compared with the checksum associated with the second performance control command. As a result of the comparison, if both are the same, the second effect control board 30 transmits a command reception signal (match) indicating that the second effect control commands are matched, so that they are matched. As a result of the comparison, if the two are different, the second effect control board 30 transmits a command reception signal (non-match) indicating non-match because the second effect control command is non-match.

  The voice command is a command for causing the first presentation control board 12 to perform processing for voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the time of production execution, and is a command that designates a mode of voice output. The second effect control board 30 transmits the command to the first effect control board 12 when the effect is executed. When receiving the command, the first effect control board 12 supplies a sound signal corresponding to the content of the command to the sound control board 13. The sound control board 13 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to perform sound output according to the sound signal. As a result, voice output in a mode specified by the voice command is realized.

  The lamp command is a command for causing the first effect control board 12 to perform processing for turning on / off the game effect lamp 9 at the time of performing the effect, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (including turning off). The specified command. The second effect control board 30 transmits the command to the first effect control board 12 when the effect is executed. When the first effect control board 12 receives the command, the first effect control board 12 supplies an electric decoration signal corresponding to the content of the command to the lamp control board 14. The lamp control board 14 turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on the electrical decoration signal. This realizes turning on / off of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp command.

  The normal operation signal is a signal transmitted periodically (here, every second) from the VDP of the display control unit 31 of the second effect control board 30 to the first effect control board 12. If the normal operation signal is periodically transmitted, the VDP of the display control unit 31 is operating normally.

  The rising signal is a normal operation (such as an operation for performing an effect) after the VDP of the display control unit 31 of the second effect control board 30 is activated (including activation by turning on the power and restarting by supplying a reset signal). Can be performed (when the initial setting is completed in the VDP of the display control unit 31 and the operation for performing the rendering is enabled), the VDP transmits to the first rendering control board 12. Signal.

  In addition, in the main board 11 (CPU 103), the first effect control board (first effect control CPU 120), and the second effect control board (VDP of the display control unit 31), it is possible to perform normal operations after activation. , These may be expressed as “getting up”.

  The reset signal (see FIG. 3) transmitted from the first effect control board 12 is supplied to the VDP of the display control unit 31. The first effect control board 12 monitors the operation of the VDP of the display control unit 31, and when it can be determined that the operation is defective (in this case, when the rising signal or the normal operation signal is not normally transmitted), the VDP (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

  The reset signal is input to a reset terminal included in the VDP of the display control unit 31. For example, the predetermined terminal of the production control CPU 120 and the reset terminal are electrically connected via the I / O 125 or the I / O of the display control unit 31 or directly, and the production control CPU 120 is reset. A reset signal is supplied by controlling the voltage (potential) of the terminal. In this embodiment, the voltage level of the reset terminal is normally maintained at High. The reset signal is a Low signal that sets the voltage level of the reset terminal to Low (that is, here, reset is active low).

  The reset signal is for forcibly resetting the VDP of the display control unit 31 in terms of hardware. When the reset signal is supplied (when the voltage level of the reset terminal becomes low or when the low level is maintained for a predetermined period or more), the VDP of the display control unit 31 is initialized (temporarily stored data is erased). The VDP is started (restarted) after the reset signal supply ends (after the rise when the voltage level of the reset terminal returns to High) (for example, the processing according to the program is started from the beginning). .

  Here, reset signal supply timing and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the first effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120), the second effect control board 30 (VDP of the display control unit 31), and the like are activated. The rise of the VDP of the display control unit 31 is slow, and the VDP rises about 7 seconds later than the first effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The first presentation control board 12 after rising performs reception monitoring of the rising signal (step S11).

  When the first effect control board 12 can receive a rising signal from the VDP for 10 seconds (after-mentioned waiting time to be described later) after rising (when the rising signal can be output by rising the VDP). Performs normal operation signal reception monitoring (step S12). The 10 seconds is set with a margin for the 7 seconds. The 10 seconds may be measured by a timer or the like provided in the RAM 122.

  When the first effect control board 12 periodically receives the normal operation signal from the VDP after the start of step S12, it is determined that there is no abnormality and continues the reception monitoring of step S12. On the other hand, when the first effect control board 12 cannot receive the normal operation signal for 5 seconds (the 5 seconds are set with a margin for the normal transmission interval of 1 second of the normal operation signal). If an abnormality has occurred, a short reset is performed in which a reset signal is transmitted once to the VDP of the display control unit 31 (step S13). What is necessary is just to measure the said 5 second with the timer etc. which are provided in RAM122.

  In the short reset, as shown in FIG. 8, a reset signal having a time width of 1 ms is transmitted once. The 1 ms reset signal may be realized by an appropriate method. For example, it may be generated based on a clock signal supplied from a predetermined clock circuit. For example, the supply of a 1 ms reset signal is realized by controlling the reset terminal to be at a low level from a certain rising timing to the next rising timing in a clock signal that rises to a high level every 1 ms. The VDP of the display control unit 31 starts (restarts) after the reset signal supply ends (after the rise when the voltage level of the reset terminal returns to High) (for example, processing according to a program (including initial setting etc.) Good.) Start from the beginning). Therefore, the VDP is kept in a reset state (also not operating) for 1 ms during which the reset signal is supplied. After the short reset (reset release), the second effect control board 30 starts up again (restarts), so the first effect control board 12 performs the process of step S11 to monitor the reception of the rising signal. The above 1 ms is set as a time sufficient to reset the VDP of the display control unit 31.

  In step S11, if the first effect control board 12 cannot receive the rising signal for 10 seconds after the rising (when the VDP cannot be raised), the second effect control board 30 is abnormal. As a result, a long reset is performed by transmitting a reset signal 60000 times to the VDP of the display control unit 31 (step S14). The number of transmissions of the reset signal is counted by, for example, a counter provided in the RAM 122.

  In the long reset, a reset signal having a time width of 1 ms is continuously transmitted 60000 times at intervals of 1 ms (falling edge of the reset signal is 1 ms) (see FIG. 8). Therefore, as a result, the reset terminal is kept low for 60000 ms (60 seconds). As described above, the VDP of the display control unit 31 starts (restarts) after the reset signal supply ends (after the reset state is released and after the rising of the voltage level of the reset terminal returns to High). For 60 seconds, the VDP does not operate (the reset state is maintained for 60 seconds). After the long reset (reset release), the VDP restarts (restarts), so the first effect control board 12 executes the process of step S11 to monitor the reception of the rising signal.

  The long reset is performed, for example, when the rise of the VDP of the display control unit 31 is delayed in the first step S11 after the power is turned on, or when the VDP of the display control unit 31 still cannot operate after the short reset (step S11). Executed. In such a case (particularly after a short reset), it is assumed that the VDP cannot be processed due to thermal runaway due to an increase in processing load. Accordingly, a cooling period of the VDP is provided by a long reset, that is, by maintaining the reset state for 60 seconds and not operating the VDP until the reset is released. As a result, it can be expected that the VDP will rise normally from now on. In addition, the cooling fan 40 is driven during the long reset (during the period during which the reset state is maintained), and the cooling of the VDP is accelerated by blowing air. The above 60 seconds is set as a time sufficient for returning the VDP to a normal operation.

  Note that, for example, even when the first effect control board 12 transmits the second effect control command including the specific command but the command reception signal is not transmitted, the first effect control board 12 can also receive the command from the first effect control board 12. A reset signal may be transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 31 (basically, a short reset is performed).

(Main operations of pachinko machines)
Hereinafter, main operations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to flowcharts and the like, but in each operation (each process), a process not described below may be performed.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
When power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 performs predetermined processing such as initial setting on the main board 11, and then executes game control timer interrupt processing. The game control timer interrupt process is executed each time a timer interrupt is generated by an interrupt request signal from a CTC (counter / timer circuit) supplied every predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds). In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes a switch process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process, a normal symbol process process, a command control process, etc., and the game control timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt. As a result, game control and the like are realized.

  In the switch processing, each switch is determined by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. It is determined for each switch whether or not it is turned on (that is, whether or not a game ball has entered or passed). The result of this determination is used in special symbol process processing and normal symbol process processing.

  The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  The special symbol process process is a process (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, This includes control of the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door). In the special symbol process, the transmission setting of the first effect control command is performed according to the progress of the game.

  The normal symbol process is based on the judgment result in the switch process, and holds and executes the ordinary game, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting prize opening) is released at the time of each ordinary figure. This is a process (including control of the normal symbol display unit 20, the general diagram hold display unit 25C, and the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory).

  The command control process is a process of actually transmitting the first effect control command transmitted and set in the special symbol process process or the like from the main board 11 to the first effect control board 12.

(Special symbol process)
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process (step S101).

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (refer to the determination result of the switch process. Hereinafter, the ON determination of various switches). The same applies to (Step S201). If the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). . For example, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number) provided in the RAM 102 to determine the first special figure reserved memory number. Can be specified (hereinafter, the same applies to the first special figure reserved storage number). When the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the RAM 102 is generated as the first start winning. , “1” is set (step S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), the first It is determined whether or not the 2 start port switch 22B is on (step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) ( Step S205). For example, the CPU 103 uses the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the second special figure reserved memory number) provided in the RAM 102 to determine the second special figure reserved memory number. Can be specified (hereinafter, the same applies to the second special figure reserved storage number). When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” as the occurrence of the second start winning (step S206).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S206, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the first special figure game is satisfied (when the first start winning is generated), the first special figure is held. The number of memories is updated to increase by 1, and when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the second special game is satisfied (the second start winning has occurred) ) Is updated so that the number of second special figure reservation storage increases by one. At this time, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the RAM 102, is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, a special figure display result (from the numerical data updated by a random counter provided in the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102 (the value is updated by the game random number update process)) ( Random value MR1 (any value from “1” to “65535”) for determination or random value MR2 for determining the big hit type (any value from “1” to “100”) Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 (any one of “1” to “100”) for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit (provided in the RAM 102) corresponding to the start port buffer value ( Step S210).

  In the process of step S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit of FIG. 11A, while the start port buffer value is “2”. Is held, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit of FIG. In this way, the hold data representing the held special figure game is stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding numbers “1” to “4” in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, for example. The numerical data of the random number values MR1 to MR3 is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates the first special figure game whose execution is put on hold.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (B), for example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the holding numbers “1” to “4” with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening. The numerical data of the random number values MR1 to MR3 is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates the second special figure game whose execution is put on hold.

  In this embodiment, in this way, the special game (notably information relating to the special game) that has not yet been started (execution is suspended) is stored as the reserved memory.

  Returning to FIG. 10, following the process of step S210, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S211). FIG. 10A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a winning random number determination process.

  In the winning random number determination process, if the starting port buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 first performs transmission setting of the first starting winning designation command and then transmits the first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command. If the setting is made and the start port buffer value is “2”, the transmission setting of the second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command is performed after the transmission setting of the second starting prize designation command is performed (step S401).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current state is a big hit gaming state (step S402). Whether or not the current state is a big hit gaming state can be specified by, for example, a value of a special figure process flag described later. Here, if it is “4” to “7”, it is in the big hit gaming state. When the value of the special figure process flag is other than “4” to “7” and the game state is not in the big hit gaming state (step S402; No), it is determined whether or not the current state is the short time state (step S403). Whether or not the current state is the time reduction state may be specified by the state of the time reduction flag (a flag provided in the RAM 102 and turned on during the time reduction state) (hereinafter the same).

  When the time reduction flag is on and the current time is in the time reduction state (step S403; Yes), when the value of the special figure process flag is “4” to “7” and the current state is the big hit gaming state (step S402; Yes), It is determined whether the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404).

  When the start port buffer value is “2” (step S404; Yes), or when the time-short state is not being reached (step S403; No), the CPU 103 extracts the random number MR1 extracted in step S209 (the special figure is suspended in the present step S210). Based on the random number value MR1 newly stored in the storage unit, the display result of the special game put on hold this time (a special symbol variable display result, hereinafter also referred to as a special figure display result) is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S405). In this determination, the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination that is referred to when determining the special figure display result at the time of starting the special figure game (when the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied). A table (see FIG. 14) is referenced.

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 becomes a determination result “big hit”. Or “losing”. When the gaming state is a non-probability change state that is not a probability change state, the first special figure display result determination table is referred to, and when the game state is a probability change state, the second special figure display result determination table is referred to. Whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state may be specified based on a probability variation flag provided in the RAM 102 and turned on when the probability variation state is established (the same applies hereinafter).

  In step S405, the CPU 103 is assigned to “big hit” in the first special figure display result determination table (when the probability variation flag is off) or the second special figure display result determination table (when the probability variation flag is on). The determined value range is set as the jackpot determination range. If it is the probability variation state, “8000” to “9899” is set as the jackpot determination range, and if it is the non-probability variation state, “8000” to “8189” is set as the jackpot determination range. Then, it is determined whether the current random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range set above (here, such determination is pre-read determination).

  When it is determined that the current random number value MR1 is within the big hit range determination and the special figure display result of the special figure game held this time is “big hit” (step S405; Yes), the big hit determination is determined as a winning determination result. The transmission setting of the designated winning time determination result designation command is performed (step S407). At this time, transmission setting of a winning determination result specifying command including EXT data (here, “02”) indicating the big hit determination is performed. If the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first winning determination result specifying command is transmitted and set. If the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second winning determination result specifying command is transmitted and set ( The same applies to transmission settings in other steps).

  It is determined that the random number value MR1 is not within the jackpot determination range, and the special figure display result of the special figure game held this time is “losing” (step S405; No), and the winning determination that specifies the loss determination as the winning determination result Transmission setting of the time determination result designation command is performed (step S408). At this time, transmission setting of a winning determination result designation command including EXT data (here, “01”) indicating the big hit determination is performed.

  When the start port buffer value is “1” (step S404; No), in order to limit the execution of the pre-reading notice, transmission setting of a winning determination result designation command for designating no determination as a winning determination result is performed (step S404). S412). This restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice on the first effect control board 12 side. At this time, transmission setting of a winning determination result specifying command including EXT data (here, “00”) indicating no determination is performed.

  By limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice for the first starting prize in the short-time state and the first starting prize in the jackpot game state (by making the judgment result no judgment), the pre-reading effect at an inappropriate timing Can be prevented.

  After steps S407, S408, and S412, the winning random number determination process ends.

  One set of each command (start winning designation command, special figure reserved memory number addition designation command, winning determination result designation command) set in the process is used as a start winning command and subsequent command control (The transmission order is the above-mentioned transmission setting order, and is the order of the start winning designation command → the special figure reserved memory number addition designation command → the winning determination result designation command). A set of the first start prize designation command, the first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command, and the first prize determination result designation command is referred to as a first start prize command, a second start prize designation command, and a second special prize command. A set of the reserved storage number addition designation command and the second prize determination result designation command is referred to as a second start prize command.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S214; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value (start port buffer value) is initialized to “0” ( Step S215), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S214; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S216). The process proceeds to step S204.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 9 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process.

  In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol holding storage number is “0” (step S231). When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), the randomness stored in the head area (the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) of the second special figure storage part Numerical data of numerical values MR1 to MR3 are read (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the second start winning is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation in the RAM 102 and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. In step S233, the total number of reserved memories is updated by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the special fluctuation figure designation buffer provided in the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (step S235; No), the randomness stored in the head area (the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) of the first special figure reservation storage unit The numerical data of the numerical values MR1 to MR3 are read (step S236). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the first start winning is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation in the RAM 102 and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the first special figure reservation storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Also, in the process of step S237, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  In this embodiment, the second special figure game is executed with higher priority than the first special figure game by the above process.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result, which is the special symbol variable display result (variable display result of the special graphic game), is determined as either “big hit” or “lost”. (Step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a first special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 14A) or a second special figure display result determination table prepared in advance in the ROM 101 is referred to. (Refer to FIG. 14 (A). Reference is made in the probability variation state). As shown in FIG. 14, in each special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a special feature of “big hit” or “losing” as the determination result. It only needs to be assigned to the diagram display result. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result read out to the fluctuation random number buffer (matches the random number value). The decision result assigned to the decision value to be used is this decision result (the same applies hereinafter). As shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 determines the special figure display result as “big hit” at a higher determination ratio in the case of the probability variation state than in the case of the probability variation state. Whether or not the state is the probability variation state may be specified by the state of the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 102.

  CPU103 determines whether the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S241).

  Thereafter, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 15) prepared in advance in the ROM 101 is used. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is “non-probability variation A”, “non-probability variation B”, “probability variation A”, “probability variation B”. As long as it is assigned to one of the jackpot types. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type read into the random number buffer for variation.

  Thereafter, the jackpot type is stored. The CPU 103 stores the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S243).

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S240 (step S240; No), after executing the process of step S243, the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special figure game to be executed this time A determined special symbol is determined (step S244). As an example, when the big hit flag is off, a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is on, one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined as the confirmed special symbol in accordance with the big hit type stored in the big hit type buffer.

  After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  If the number of reserved memories of the first special figure game is “0” in step S235 (step S235; Yes), the demonstration display setting is performed (step S246), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting, for example, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating the start of demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is sent from the main board 11 to the first effect control board 12. It is determined whether or not transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, after setting the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern at the big hit is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S261; No), the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined (step S263). The variation pattern is for designating the execution time (special diagram variation time) of the variable display of the special symbol game or the decorative symbol and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 17 shows the variation pattern used in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are PA1-1, PA2-1, PA3-2 to PA3-4 as fluctuation patterns at the time of loss. Moreover, there are PB3-2 to PB3-4 as a variation pattern at the time of big hit. PA1-1 and PA2-1 specify non-reach. PA2-1 is a pattern for time reduction (with shortening) in which the special figure variation time (execution period of the special figure game) is shorter than normal (PA1-1). PA3-2 and PB3-2 designate execution of normal reach (no development), PA3-3 and PB3-3 designate execution of reach production that develops from normal reach to super reach A, and PA3-4 and PB3. -4 designates execution of reach production that develops from normal reach to super reach B.

  In the process of step S262, for example, the big hit variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table prepared in the ROM 101. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, for example, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine each variation pattern at the big hit as a determination result so as to realize the determination ratio of FIG. PB3-2 to PB3-4) may be assigned. The CPU 103 refers to the big hit variation pattern determination table on the basis of the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for variation pattern read to the random number buffer for variation, thereby determining the variation pattern (PB3-2 to PB3- 4) may be determined.

  Further, in the process of step S263, for example, the variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table or the second loss variation pattern determination table prepared in the ROM 101. The first loss variation pattern determination table is used when not in the time-short state, and the second loss variation pattern determination table is used when in the time-short state. Whether or not the time is short is specified by a time short flag provided in the RAM 102. In the first loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a variation at the time of loss as a determination result so as to realize the determination ratio of FIG. What is necessary is just to be assigned to the pattern (PA1-1, PA3-2 to PA3-4). In the second loss variation pattern determination table, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a variation at the time of loss as a determination result so as to realize the determination ratio of FIG. It is only necessary to be assigned to the patterns (PA2-1, PA3-2 to PA3-4). The CPU 103 refers to the first or second loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 read into the variation random number buffer, thereby causing the variation pattern (PA1- 1, any one of PA3-2 to PA3-4, or any one of PA2-1, PA3-2 to PA3-4) may be determined.

  Referring to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the determination ratio of the variation pattern is higher in the order of PA1-1 or PA2-1> PA3-2> PA3-3> PA3-4 when lost. The big hit is higher in the order of PB3-4> PB3-3> PB3-2. For this reason, the big hit expectation degree is high in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach (no development). Further, PA2-1 (see FIG. 17) having a short special figure variation time is selected in the short-time state, so that in the short-time state, the average special-figure variation time is shorter than that in the non-time-short state.

  After executing one of the processes of steps S262 and S263, a special figure fluctuation time (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined this time is set (step S266). For example, a timer initial value corresponding to the special figure variation time is set in a predetermined timer of the RAM 102 (hereinafter, the elapsed time from the start of the special figure game execution is measured by updating the timer value at each timer interruption or the like. Will be.)

  Subsequent to the process of step S266, the special symbol change is started so as to start one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game for which the start condition is satisfied (step S267). ). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a drive signal for executing the first special symbol game is transmitted to the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a drive signal for executing the second special symbol game is transmitted to the second special symbol display device 4B.

  After the processing of step S267 is executed, transmission setting of a change start time command (various commands specifying the determination result and the like) is performed as a command at the start of execution of the special figure game (step S271). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a first fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a display result designation command, and a first special figure pending memory number subtraction designation command. I do. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 transmits the second fluctuation start designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command, display result designation command, and second special figure pending memory number subtraction designation command. I do.

  After executing the process of step S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether the elapsed time since the start of the special figure game (measured by the predetermined timer or the like) has reached the special figure variation time set above (the predetermined timer value is 0). If it is not reached, a drive signal for executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is supplied to the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The process is terminated after the process of changing the special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation time is reached, the timing for deriving the variable display result is reached, so a predetermined drive signal is supplied to the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and determined as described above. This variable display result (may be specified by the big hit flag or the big hit type stored in the big hit type buffer) ("-" for "losing", "2" for "non-probable change A") ”4” for “non-probability change B”, “5” for “probability change A”, “7” for “probability change B”, etc. And the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. By executing step S112 repeatedly every time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution of the special game is realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. For example, when the variable display result of this time is “big hit” (when the big hit flag is on, etc.), the CPU 103 resets the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag to off. After that, transmission setting of the hit start designation command is performed, the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, and this processing is terminated. In the case of a time reduction state such as “losing” (when the big hit flag is off, etc.), it is determined whether a predetermined number of variable displays that can be executed in the time reduction state has been executed (for example, a time reduction counter (time reduction) provided in the RAM 102). (The counter for counting the remaining number) is decremented by 1 and it is determined whether the value after the decrement is “0”), or when variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (the count value is “0”). ”), The time reduction flag is reset to OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is set to“ 0 ”, and the process is terminated. Even in the case of “losing” and not being in a short time state, when the predetermined number of variable displays has not been executed, the process is terminated by setting the value of the special figure process flag to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. For example, an elapsed time (which may be measured by a timer or the like provided in the RAM 102, the same as for other elapsed times) after the transmission setting of the hit start designation command is set in advance as a fanfare waiting time ( It is determined whether or not the waiting time from the start of fanfare to the end in the big hit gaming state has been reached. When the fanfare waiting time is reached, the special prize process flag is updated to “5” by performing a process (opening of a solenoid drive signal) for opening the big prize opening in order to start a round game. By repeating step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to end the round game. The number of times the count switch 23 is turned on (the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening) becomes a predetermined value (for example, “9”) (the counter provided in the RAM 102 may be counted), or round games are played. When the elapsed time from the start (after opening the grand prize opening) reaches the upper limit period (for example, 29 seconds) of the round game, and when it is time to end the round game, A process of returning to the closed state and ending the round game (a process of turning off the solenoid 82) is performed. At this time, when the finished round game is the last round game (for example, the 15th round) (the counter may be counted by a counter or the like provided in the RAM 102), the processing shown in FIG. ), This process is terminated. When it is not the last round game, the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, and this process is terminated. If the current time is not the timing for ending the round game, the processing is terminated as it is (the processing for maintaining the big prize opening in an open state may be performed). By repeating step S115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the big prize opening is maintained until the timing for returning the big prize opening to the closed state, and finally the big prize opening is closed.

  Here, the process executed in the last round game will be described with reference to FIG. First, an ending waiting time (a waiting time from the start to the end of the ending in the big hit gaming state, which is a predetermined time) is set (step S601). For example, a timer initial value corresponding to the ending waiting time is set in a predetermined timer in the RAM 102 (hereinafter, the elapsed time from the end of the last round game is measured by updating the timer value at each timer interrupt or the like. (Step S601). Also, a value corresponding to the big hit type (big hit type buffer setting value) stored in the big hit type buffer ("00", "probable change B" or "non-probable change B" when "probability change A" or "non-probability change A"). In this case, a setting is made to transmit a hit end designation command in which “01” is set in the EXT data (step S602), and a process of updating the special figure process flag to “7” (step S603) is also performed. On the first effect control board 12 side, if the EXT data (XX) of the hit end designating command is “00”, the initial number of time reductions (the number of executions of the special-purpose game that can be executed before the time reduction state ends) is initial. A value of 50 is specified. If the EXT data (XX) of the winning end designation command is “01”, 100 is specified as the initial value of the remaining time.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the elapsed time from the end of the round game (after closing the big prize opening) has reached a predetermined closing time (round game interval period). In this case, the closed state is maintained, and the present process ends. When the predetermined closing time is reached, in order to start the round game, a process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and this process is terminated.

  Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 every time a timer interrupt occurs after the big winning opening is opened in step S114.

  The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7” (see FIG. 21). In the jackpot ending process, whether the elapsed time from the end of the last round game (measured by the predetermined timer or the like) has reached the ending waiting time set above (the predetermined timer value becomes 0). It is determined whether the ending waiting time has ended (step S611). When the ending waiting time has not ended (step S611; No), since the ending has not ended, the jackpot end processing is ended as it is.

  When the ending waiting time is finished (when the timer value of the predetermined timer is “0”) (step S611; Yes), the ending is finished. Next, the current jackpot type is changed reliably (“probability change A”). Or “probability variation B”) (step S612). The jackpot type may be specified by the jackpot type buffer setting value stored in the jackpot type buffer. When the big hit type is “probability change A” or “probability change B” (step S612; Yes), the probability change flag is set to the on state (step S613). After step S613 or when the current big hit type is not a certain change (step S612; No), the time reduction number corresponding to the big hit type is set as an initial value (initial value of the short time remaining number) in the time reduction number counter and the time reduction The flag is turned on (step S615). If the big hit type is “probability variation A” or “non-probability variation A”, “50” is set as the count initial value in the hourly number counter. If the big hit type is “probability variation B” or “non-probability variation B”, “100” is set as the initial count value in the hourly number counter. When the value of the time reduction counter becomes “0”, all the special-purpose games that can be executed in the time reduction state have been executed, so the time reduction state ends.

  By the processing as described above, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “probability variation A” or “probability variation B” becomes the high probability high base state. In addition, the remaining number of times (the number of executions of the special figure game that can be executed until the time-short state is finished) is set to “50” when “probability variation A”, and “100 times” when “probability variation B”. It is set (see FIG. 15). In addition, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “non-probability change A” or “non-probability change B” is a low probability high base state. Also, the remaining number of time reductions is set to “50 times” when “non-probability variation A”, and “100 times” when “non-probability variation B” (see FIG. 15). As described above, the initial number at the start of the time reduction of the number of remaining time reductions is set by the number corresponding to the jackpot type.

  After step S615, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” (step S616), and this process ends.

  In the above series of processing, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, one variable display or the like has ended, so the game control process timer, the jackpot type buffer setting value, Various data such as the state of various flags (those that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) may be reset as appropriate.

(Main operations of the first effect control board 12)
When power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first effect control board 12 starts up the effect control CPU 120 and rises, for example, and then executes a predetermined effect control main process (FIG. 22). When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process, clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the CTC (counter mounted on the first effect control board 12). / Timer circuit) register setting, etc. (step S701). Thereafter, a timer initial value corresponding to a predetermined rising waiting time is set in the rising waiting time timer (provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122) (step S702). The rise waiting time is a time (above 10 seconds) corresponding to a period from when the VDP of the display control unit 31 is activated until normal operation can be performed (that is, the time until the VDP rises). is there. The rise wait time is measured by the rise wait time timer.

  After step S703, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step S703). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time elapses in a timer interrupt process that is executed separately from the effect control main process, for example, based on register settings of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits. For this reason, the processing described later is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs.

  On the first effect control board 12 side, a first effect control command from the main board 11 and a signal from the second effect control board 30 (FIG. 6) apart from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. Of various signals) is appropriately performed. The received first effect control command and the signal (data indicated by the signal) are stored in a first effect control command reception buffer or a signal reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. The first effect control command or signal (data indicated by the signal) stored in each buffer is received confirmation (after Steps S706, S710, S716, which will be described later) or the stored first effect control command or signal. When a predetermined process (steps S723, S725, S760, S762, etc.) is performed by the effect control CPU 120 based on (the data indicated by the signal), the effect control CPU 120 deletes it from each buffer at an appropriate timing. Shall be.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S703; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S704), and whether the normal operation confirmation timer is operating (for example, the timer value is If it is not 0, it is determined that it is operating (step S705). The normal operation confirmation timer is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and is a timer for measuring a reception waiting time of a normal operation signal periodically transmitted from the second effect control board 30.

  If the timer value of the normal operation confirmation timer is 0 and the timer is not in operation (step S705; No), it is determined whether the rising signal (signal transmitted at the rising time) from the second effect control board 30 is received. Determination is made (step S706). For example, the reception is determined based on whether or not the rising signal data (4-byte data set as the rising signal) is stored in the signal reception buffer. When the rising signal data is not stored in the signal receiving buffer and the rising signal is not received (step S706; No), the timer value of the rising waiting time timer is reduced by 1 (step S707) and reduced. It is determined whether the subsequent timer value is “0” (step S708).

  If the timer value after decrementing by 1 is “0” (step S708; Yes), the rise waiting time (10 seconds) has elapsed without receiving the rise signal, so the second effect control. Assuming that the substrate 30 (VDP of the display control unit 31) has not started up normally, a long reset process (see “Long Reset” in FIG. 8) for sending a reset signal to the VDP 60000 times is executed to stop the operation of the VDP. At the same time, the cooling fan 40 is driven (a cooling fan drive signal is supplied) to cool the VDP (step S709). Thus, the long reset of FIG. 8 is realized, and the VDP is cooled during the long reset period. As an example of step S709, the production control CPU 120 increments the count value of the counter provided in the RAM 122 (initial value is 0) by one each time a reset signal is transmitted, and the count value reaches 60000. When the reset signal has been supplied 60000 times, the long reset or driving of the cooling fan may be terminated. By such a long reset or the like, even if a thermal runaway or the like has occurred in the VDP, the VDP can be returned to a normal state. After step S709, the second effect control board 30 is restarted, and the process is executed again from step S702. In step S709, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a predetermined audio signal or an illumination signal to the audio control board 13 or the lamp control board 14 and outputs a sound for notifying the abnormality from the speakers 8L and 8R. The game effect lamp 9 may be turned on in an abnormality notification mode.

  When the rising signal is received (when the rising signal data is stored in the signal receiving buffer) (step S707; Yes), the second effect control board 30 (VDP of the display control unit 31) has started up normally. Therefore, this time, a timer initial value is set in the normal operation confirmation timer (step S714). Note that the timer value of the rise waiting time timer is reset to 0 before executing step S714. The timer initial value of the normal operation confirmation timer may be a value corresponding to a period (here, 5 seconds or the like) corresponding to a normal operation signal transmission interval (here, 1 second).

  If the normal operation confirmation timer is operating (such as when the timer value is not 0) (step S705; Yes), it is determined whether a normal operation signal has been received (step S710). For example, the reception is determined based on whether or not normal operation signal data (4-byte data set as the normal operation signal) is stored in the signal reception buffer. When the normal operation signal is received because the data is stored (step S710; Yes), the second effect control board 30 is operating normally and waits for the reception of the next normal operation signal. In addition, the process of step S714 is executed.

  When the normal operation signal is not received because there is no storage of the normal operation signal (step S710; No), the timer value of the normal operation confirmation timer is reduced by 1 (step S711), and the timer value after the subtraction is 0. (Step S712). If it is determined that it is 0 (step S712; Yes), it is considered that an abnormality has occurred in the VDP of the display control unit 31, and therefore a short reset process ("short" in FIG. 8) that sends a reset signal to the VDP once. Reset ”) is executed to reset the VDP (step S713). Thereby, the short reset of FIG. 8 is implement | achieved. After step S713, the second effect control board 30 is restarted, so the process is executed again from step S702. In step S713, in addition to the above short reset, in order to stop the effect being executed, for example, the first effect control command or signal (in the first effect control command reception buffer or the signal reception buffer) is stored. When the various signals in FIG. 6 are deleted or the effect is set to be executed (step S723), the effect (for example, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed. Reset (for example, delete the pattern data set as a use pattern in step S723 from the RAM 122), reset the timer values of various timers, or reset the count values of various counters. In step S713, the production control CPU 120 supplies a predetermined audio signal or electrical decoration signal to the audio control board 13 or the lamp control board 14 to output an audio for notifying the abnormality from the speakers 8L and 8R, or to play a game. For example, a process of lighting the effect lamp 9 in an abnormality notification mode or the like may be performed (in this way, abnormality notification may be performed).

  If the timer value after step S714 or after subtraction is not 0 (step S712; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the reception confirmation timer is operating (for example, if the timer value is not 0). Is determined to be in operation) (step S716). The reception confirmation timer is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when a second effect control command including a specific command is transmitted to the second effect control board 30, a command reception signal returned from the second effect control board 30 is received. This is a timer for measuring the reception waiting time. If the timer value is 0 and the reception confirmation timer is not operating (step S715; No), the second effect control command including the specific command is not transmitted to the second effect control board 30, and therefore the process of step S721 is performed. skip.

  If the timer value is not 0 and the reception confirmation timer is operating (step S715; Yes), it is determined whether a command reception signal is received (step S716). For example, the reception is determined based on whether or not the data of the command reception signal (4-byte data set as the command reception signal) is stored in the signal reception buffer. If the command reception signal is received because the data is stored (step S716; Yes), a response to the transmission of the second effect control command including the specific command is returned from the second effect control board 30. Therefore, the reception confirmation timer is reset (step S717). If the current command received signal is a command received signal indicating inconsistency (non-matching), the same short reset process as in step S713 (the above abnormality notification may be appropriately performed. The same applies to the short reset process). Then, the process of step S702 may be executed again. Further, when the commands are inconsistent, only the command stored in the first effect control command reception buffer may be deleted.

  If the command reception signal is not received because the command reception signal data is not stored in the signal reception buffer (step S716; No), the timer value of the reception confirmation timer is decremented by 1 (step S718). After that, it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step S719). If it is determined that the timer value is 0 (step S719; Yes), the response to the transmission of the second effect control command including the specific command is the second. Since it is considered that an abnormality has occurred in the second effect control board 30 without returning from the effect control board 30, a short reset process similar to step S713 is performed (step S720), and then the process of step S702 is executed. .

  After step S717, if the timer value of the reception confirmation timer is not 0 (step S719; No), processing such as first effect control command analysis for analyzing the first effect control command is performed (step S721). In the first effect control command, for example, the process of FIG. 23 is performed.

  In processing such as first effect control command analysis, the first effect control command reception buffer is checked to determine whether or not there is an unanalyzed received command (first effect control command) (step S751). As described above, the command stored in the first effect control command reception buffer is deleted from each buffer when predetermined processing (in this case, steps S760 and S762) is performed. The first effect control command currently stored in the control command reception buffer becomes an unanalyzed received command. Note that the received commands are stored in the order of reception.

  If no command is stored in the first effect control command reception buffer, it is determined that there is no command to be analyzed (step S751; No), and this process is terminated. When a command is stored (step S751; Yes), the earliest command received earliest among the stored commands (unanalyzed commands) is analyzed (step S752). The effect control CPU 120 checks the data content of the earliest command and identifies the command that is the first effect control command, thereby analyzing the command. For example, the MODE data whose first bit is “1” is specified, and the command of the first effect control command is specified by the data content of the specified MODE data.

  After step S752, it is confirmed whether the analyzed received command is a hit end designation command (step S753). If it is a hit end designation command (step S753; Yes), the number of variable displays that can be executed in the current short time state according to the value specified by “XX” of the EXT data of the command (if “00”) 50 times, “100 times if“ 01 ”) is set as an initial value in the remaining time counter (step S754). The short time remaining number counter is for counting the short time remaining number (the number of executions of the special figure game that can be executed until the time short state is finished) on the first effect control board 12 side, and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is done. The count value of the remaining time counter is equal to the count value of the shorter time counter on the main board 11 side.

  If it is not a hit end designation command (step S753; No), it is determined whether the analyzed received command is a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S755). If it is a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S755; Yes), the time is shortened. The count value of the remaining number counter is decremented by 1 (step S756). The change pattern designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game. At this time, by subtracting the count value by 1, the count value of the short time remaining number counter accurately reflects the short time remaining number of times. (Note that the remaining time in this embodiment is the number of times that the variable display executed this time is not counted as one).

  Note that when the count value of the remaining time counter is already “0” (that is, when it is in a non-short-time state), the count value remains “0”. Thus, the presence / absence of the time-short state is known by the time-short remaining number counter. Note that it may be determined whether or not the current state is the time-saving state, and steps S755 and S756 may be executed when the current state is the time-shortening state. Whether the time is short or not, for example, every time a gaming state designation command is transmitted, the production side short time flag (a flag that is turned on when the time is short, is stored in the RAM 122 according to the gaming state designated by the command). It is also possible to specify the status according to the state of the flag.

  After steps S754 and S756, or when the analyzed received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S755; No), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received command (first effect control command) as a header, and a time-saving remaining number counter. A second effect control command (see FIG. 5) is generated using the data indicating the count value (that is, the numerical data indicating the remaining time in 2 bytes) as the footer (step S757). When not in the time-short state, the time-short remaining count value is “0”, so “0000 (H)” is set as the footer. When the received command analyzed this time is the first effect control command other than the variation pattern designation command, the footer is set to “0000 (H)” (data indicating the remaining number of time reductions = 0) regardless of the remaining time. Also good. In the time-short state, as will be described later, the number of remaining times is displayed by the control of the second effect control board 30, but the second effect control board 30 has received the second effect control command including the variation pattern designation command. This is because the display of the remaining number of time reductions is sometimes updated (details will be described later).

  After step S757, the analyzed received command (first production control command included in the generated second production control command) is a specific command (variation pattern designation command, hit start designation command, hit end designation command, customer waiting demonstration designation command). Is determined (step S758).

  When it is a specific command (step S758; Yes), a checksum is calculated based on the numerical value of the second effect control command generated this time in step S757 (step S759), and the second effect control command is used as the second effect control board. 30 and a checksum associated with the command (step S760). Thereafter, an initial value is set in the reception confirmation timer (step S761). The initial value is set in advance, and corresponds to a period required from when the second effect control command including the specific command is transmitted until the command reception signal is normally received from the second effect control board 30 as a response. Such as value.

  If it is not a specific command (step S758; No), the second effect control command generated this time in step S757 is transmitted to the second effect control board 30 (step S762).

  After step S761 or S762, the process of step S751 is executed. As described above, when executing steps S760 and S762, the first effect control command to be analyzed this time stored in the first effect control command reception buffer is deleted. By doing so, it is possible to perform processing such as analysis for all the commands stored in the first effect control command reception buffer.

  Returning to FIG. 22, after the first effect control command analysis process (step S721), it is determined whether a voice command or a lamp command is received (step S722). For example, the reception is determined based on whether or not voice command or ramp command data (4-byte data set as the voice command or ramp command) is stored in the signal reception buffer. When the voice command or the lamp command is received because the data is stored or the like (step S716; Yes), the performance execution setting is performed in the mode specified by the voice command or the lamp command (step S723). For example, pattern data (stored in the ROM 121) corresponding to a voice command or a lamp command is set as a usage pattern (read out to the RAM 122, etc.). The pattern data includes, for example, process data including audio signal data and electrical signal data associated with determination values such as process timer determination values. Further, for example, an initial value corresponding to a voice command or a ramp command is set in a process timer provided in the RAM 122. When both the voice command and the lamp command are received, the effect execution setting is performed for both the effect on the speakers 8L and 8R and the effect on the game effect lamp 9.

  If no voice command or lamp command is received after step S723 (step S722; No), it is determined whether or not there is an execution setting of at least one of the effects at the speakers 8L and 8R and the effects at the game effect lamp 9. (Step S724), for example, when there is an execution setting when pattern data is set as a usage pattern, the production operation control is performed for the effect set to be executed (Step S725). For example, the timer value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the audio signal and / or the illumination signal indicated by the data (data included in the usage pattern) corresponding to the process timer determination value that matches the reduced timer value is represented by the audio control board 13 and / Or to the lamp control board 14. Thereby, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, lighting by the game effect lamp 9, and the like are executed. By executing the process in step S725 for each timer interruption, the speaker 8L, 8R can execute an effect by sound output in accordance with the sound command, and the effect of the lighting mode according to the lamp command can be achieved. It can be executed with.

  After step S725, if there is no execution setting (step S724; No), the process of step S704 is executed.

  By performing such a series of processes for each timer interruption, the first effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) confirms the rising of the second effect control board 30 (confirmed by the rising signal) and the second effect. Generation and transmission of control commands and accompanying transmission of sum check (addition of number of short time remaining), confirmation of reception of second production control command (confirmed by command reception signal), normal operation of second production control board 30 It is possible to confirm whether or not (confirm by a normal operation signal), execute an effect using the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9, reset the second effect control board 30 (transmit a reset signal), and the like.

(Main operations of second effect control board 30 (VDP of display control unit 31))
In the second effect control board 30, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on or a reset signal is supplied, the VDP executes the second effect control main process of FIG.

  The VDP of the display control unit 31 first executes a predetermined initial setting process, clears the VRAM, sets various initial values, and sets a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) included in the display control unit 31 or VDP. Etc. are performed (step S71). As a result, when the process ends, the VDP of the display control unit 31 is in a state in which a normal process for effect execution can be executed (that is, a state in which the effect has been raised). (Step S71). As described above, the VDP of the display control unit 31 may take a longer time to start up (initial setting, etc.) than the CPU 103 of the main board 11 or the CPU 120 for effect control of the first effect control board 12. The signal can notify the first effect control board 12 that it has started up (note that after the start-up, a demo display is performed, whereby the player starts the game).

  After step S72, the VDP of the display control unit 31 sets a predetermined timer initial value for the operation check timer (step S73). The operation confirmation timer is provided in the VRAM of the display control unit 31 and is used for measuring a period until the next transmission timing of the normal operation signal. The timer initial value is a normal operation signal transmission interval (here. In this case, the value corresponds to 1 second).

  After step S73, the VDP of the display control unit 31 determines whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area such as a VRAM is on (step S74). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting in a timer interrupt process executed separately from the second effect control main process. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits. For this reason, the processing described later is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs.

  On the second effect control board 30 side, a process for capturing (receiving) a second effect control command from the first effect control board 12 separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. Is appropriately performed. The received second effect control command is stored, for example, in a second effect control command reception buffer provided in the VRAM or the like in the order of reception (if the checksum is attached, the checksum is also stored in the second effect control command). Stored corresponding to). It should be noted that the command stored in the second effect control command reception buffer is deleted by the display control unit 31 at an appropriate timing when used in processing such as second effect control command analysis described later.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S74; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S75), and processing such as second effect control command analysis (FIG. 25) is executed (FIG. 25). Step S76).

  In the second effect control command analysis process or the like, the VDP of the display control unit 31 checks the second effect control command reception buffer (step S771). Thereafter, when data is not stored in the second effect control command reception buffer (step S771; No), this process is terminated. When the data is stored (step S771; Yes), it is determined whether the data is data arranged as a second effect control command that is a received command (step S773).

  As described above, the header of the second effect control command is the first effect control command, and the first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data that is the upper byte data of the first effect control command is always “1”. It becomes. On the other hand, the first bit (binary number) of EXT data, which is lower byte data of the first effect control command, is “0”. In addition, the footer of the second effect control command designates the remaining number of time reductions and takes a value up to 100 in decimal. Therefore, the top of each data of the upper 1 byte and the lower 1 byte of the footer. The bit is also “0”. Further, in the sum check, the first bit is “0” as described above. For this reason, it can be seen that the 1-byte data whose first bit is “1” is the header of the second effect control command (MODE data of the first effect control command). In addition, when the first effect control command included in the second effect control command is the specific command (any one of the variation pattern designation command, the hit start designation command, the hit end designation command, and the customer waiting demonstration designation command) ( The header of the second effect control command (which can be specified by the MODE data of the first effect control command) and a checksum are attached.

  That is, when the first effect control command included in the second effect control command is not a specific command, three 1-byte data (hereinafter referred to as subsequent 1-byte data) having the first bit “0” continues (lower header). And the footer are composed of subsequent 1-byte data.) When the first effect control command included in the second effect control command is a specific command, the subsequent 1-byte data continues with four (the header lower part and the footer are composed of the first 3 bytes of the subsequent 1-byte data. , The checksum is composed of the last 1 byte).

  On the other hand, when the subsequent 1-byte data is 2 or less or 5 or more (for example, when there is only 1 subsequent 1-byte data following the MODE data and the subsequent data is not stored in the buffer, If the subsequent 1-byte data is one and the subsequent data is other MODE data), the data constituting the second effect control command is not complete.

  In step S773, the VDP of the display control unit 31 determines whether all of the data in the second effect control command reception buffer is data that is arranged as one or more second effect control commands (all the second effect control commands in the buffer). 2) When the second effect control command includes a specific command, for example, when the second effect control command includes four specific byte commands, the second effect control command is other than the specific command. When the first effect control command is included, if there are not three subsequent 1-byte data) (step S773; No), the command (data) in the second effect control command reception buffer is all received because of abnormal reception. It deletes (step S774) and this process is complete | finished.

  In step S774, if there is an effect that is being executed, the execution of the effect may be stopped (for example, an effect control pattern set as a later-described use pattern is reset, and an effect process flag is reset to 0) Etc.) The VDP of the display control unit 31 may supply a predetermined video signal to the image display device 5 to display a screen indicating that an abnormality has occurred.

  In step S773, it may be determined whether the data constituting the second effect control command is available by determining whether the subsequent 1-byte data following the MODE data is three or four.

  When all the data in the second effect control command reception buffer is data that is gathered as one or more second effect control commands (for example, when the second effect control command includes a specific command, there are four subsequent 1-byte data. In the case where the second effect control command includes the first effect control command other than the specific command, there are three subsequent 1-byte data) (step S771; Yes), one or more second effect controls It is determined whether there is a command accompanied by a checksum (step S781). For example, it may be determined whether the subsequent 1-byte data has four commands. Or what is necessary is just to determine whether the said 2nd production control command contains a specific command by the MODE data of a 1st production control command.

  When the checksum is attached (step S781; Yes), the data of each bit constituting the second effect control command is added, and 7F is added to the added value to set the first bit to 0. Then calculate the checksum. The consistency of the command is determined based on whether the calculated checksum is the same as the accompanying checksum (step S782). After that, when it is determined as inconsistent (step S783; No), processing such as deleting all received commands is performed (step S784, which is the same as step S774), and the first effect control board 12 is processed. A command reception signal (non-matching) is transmitted to (step S785), and this processing is terminated. When the command is matched (step S783; No), a command reception signal (match) is transmitted (step S786).

  After step S786, if there is no received command (second effect control command) accompanied by a checksum (step S781; No), processing corresponding to the content of the received command (MODE data), that is, which first received command is The process shown in FIG. 26 is performed according to whether the second effect control command includes the effect control command (step S78). In step S786, when there are a plurality of second effect control commands, the processing shown in FIG. 26 is performed for all the second effect control commands.

  FIG. 26 shows the relationship between the first effect control command (first effect control command name) included in the second effect control command and the processing content corresponding to the second effect control command. Each command reception flag, each command storage area, and command buffer in FIG. 26 is provided in a VRAM of the display control unit 31 or the like. In addition, “set” for each command reception flag means to turn on the flag. The state of each command reception flag and the command (second effect control command) stored in each command storage area may be reset or deleted at an appropriate timing (checking the flag state or command) It may be reset or erased at a timing that is not necessary.)

  When a second effect control command including a game state designation command is received, a high-accuracy flag (a flag that is turned on at the time of high-accuracy and set in a predetermined area such as a VRAM, according to the game state designated by the game state designation command ) And a high base flag (a flag that is turned on at the time of high base and provided in a VRAM or the like). When the gaming state designation command designates the probability changing state, the high probability flag is turned on (if it is already on, the state is maintained). When the gaming state designation command designates the short time state, the high base flag is turned on (if the state is already on, the state is maintained).

  As shown in FIG. 27A, a hold display number (first hold display number) serving as a buffer number is set in the first start winning command buffer. When receiving each second effect control command including a first start winning designation command, a first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command, and a first winning determination result designation command, the first start winning designation command, A set corresponding to the first hold display numbers “1” to “4” is set by setting one command for the first start winning prize including the one special figure reserved memory number addition designation command and the first prize determination result designation command. Store in order from the beginning of the free area in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (B), a hold display number (second hold display number) serving as a buffer number is set in the second start winning command buffer. When receiving each second effect control command including the second start winning designation command, the second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command, and the second winning determination result designation command, the first start winning designation command, A storage area corresponding to the second hold display numbers “1” to “4” as a set of the second start winning command including the one special figure reserved memory number addition specifying command and the second winning determination result specifying command Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area.

  The first start winning command is transmitted as a part of the second effect control command from the main board 11 via the first effect control board 12 in response to occurrence of the hold of the first special figure game. When one special figure game is put on hold (when the first start prize is generated), one set of received commands (first start prize command) stored in the first start prize command buffer is increased by one. Become. The second start winning time command is transmitted as a part of the second effect control command from the main board 11 via the first effect control board 12 in response to occurrence of the hold of the second special figure game. In response to the occurrence of the suspension of the 2 special figure game, one set of received commands (second start winning command) stored in the second starting winning command buffer is increased by one.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when the first special figure game is executed, the first start winning command stored corresponding to the first hold display numbers “2” to “4” is assigned to the first number. 1 hold display numbers “1” to “3” (see step S321 described later). Similarly, when the second special figure game is executed, the second hold display number of the second start winning prize command stored corresponding to the second hold display number “2” to “4” is the higher number. The shift is performed from “1” to “3” (see step S321 described later).

  As described above, the first start winning command and the hold data stored in correspondence with the same number in the hold display number in the first start winning command buffer and the hold number in the first special figure holding storage unit. (And the first special game corresponding to the hold data) and the number of first start winning commands stored in the first start winning command buffer is the number of the first special game. It will be the same as the number of 1 special figure hold memory. Also, the second start winning command and the hold data (and the hold data) stored in correspondence with the same number in the hold display number in the second start winning command buffer and the hold number in the second special figure hold storage unit. And the number of the second start winning command stored in the second start winning command buffer is the second special figure holding memory of the second special game. It becomes the same as the number.

  Further, each hold display number in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer also corresponds to each display position of the hold display image.

  Specifically, each hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to each display position of the first hold display image provided in the area 5Ha of the display area 5H, and the hold display number “1” is Corresponding to the leftmost display position in the area 5Ha, the hold display number “2” corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 5Ha, and the hold display number “3” is the third display position from the left in the area 5Ha. The hold display number “4” corresponds to the fourth (rightmost) display position from the left in the region 5Ha.

  Specifically, each hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to each display position of the second hold display image provided in the area 5Hb of the display area 5H, and the hold display number “1” is Corresponding to the leftmost display position in the area 5Hb, the hold display number “2” corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 5Hb, and the hold display number “3” is the third display position from the left in the area 5Hb. The hold display number “4” corresponds to the fourth (rightmost) display position from the left in the area 5Hb.

  In addition, each of the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer includes first hold change effect information which is information indicating that the first hold change effect is executed corresponding to each hold display number. And a storage area for storing prefetch chance information, which is information indicating execution of the prefetch chance.

  Here, the first hold change effect information indicates that the first hold change effect that targets the special game corresponding to the hold display number corresponding to the information is executed, and the type of the first hold change effect. (Details will be described later).

  Here, the prefetch chance information indicates that the prefetch chance target targeting the special game corresponding to the hold display number corresponding to the information is executed, and the type of the prefetch chance eye (details will be described later). ).

  As will be described in detail later, when the variable display is executed, the first hold change effect information and the prefetch chance information are checked, and whether or not the first hold change effect and the prefetch chance eye in the variable display are executed and the effect to be executed are checked. The type is specified.

  In the start winning command buffer of FIG. 27, “0000 (H)” indicates that no command is stored, and “-” in the first hold change effect information column indicates first hold change effect information. Is not stored (the first hold change effect targeting the special figure game corresponding to the hold display number corresponding to the information is not executed). “−” In the pre-reading chance information column indicates that pre-reading chance information is not stored (the pre-reading chance target targeting the special game corresponding to the hold display number corresponding to the information is not executed). Show.

  Further, when the second effect control command including the first special figure reserved memory number addition designation command is received, a process of newly displaying the first reserved display image in the area 5Ha of the display area 5H is performed. When the second effect control command including the second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command is received, a process of newly displaying the second reserved display image in the area 5Ha of the display area 5H is performed. As a result, the first hold display image is incremented by one in response to the first special figure game being newly held based on the occurrence of the first start winning. Also, the second hold display image is incremented by one in response to the second special figure game being newly held based on the occurrence of the second start winning. The hold display image may be updated by a prefetch advance notice setting process described later.

  Further, when receiving the second effect control command including the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the image display device 5 is controlled (sequentially transmitting the video signal), and the image display device 5 is caused to perform the demonstration display. The demonstration display is performed until variable display is started. Further, the display control unit 31 may transmit a lamp command or a voice command for executing an effect by outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9, or the like to the first effect control board 12.

  Returning to FIG. 24, after performing the second effect control command analysis process (step S76), the effect control process is executed (step S77). The effect control process will be described later. Then, the effect random number update process is executed (step S78). In the effect random number update process, numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by an effect random counter such as VRAM is updated by software as various random values used for effect control. Thereafter, the timer value of the operation confirmation timer is decremented by 1 (step S79), and it is determined whether the timer value after decrement is 0 (step S80). If it is 0 (step S80; Yes), A normal operation signal is transmitted (step S81), and then an initial value (same as the initial value of step S73) is set in the operation check timer (step S82), and the process of step S74 is executed again (after subtraction) The same applies when the timer value is not 0 (step S80; No)). A normal operation signal is periodically transmitted to the first effect control board 12 through steps S79 to S82 and the like.

  Next, the production control process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 28, the VDP of the display control unit 31 first executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) and then the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area such as VRAM (initially , “0”), and selects and executes one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175.

  First, the prefetch notice setting process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch notice setting process.

  In the pre-reading notice setting process, the VDP of the display control unit 31 first determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received this time (whether it has been received as the header of the second effect control command. The same applies to the effect control command) (step S671). When a plurality of sets of start winning commands are stored in the start winning command buffer, the following processing may be performed for the start winning commands of each set.

  If no new start winning command is received (step S67; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated because the pre-reading notice is not executed.

  When a new start winning command is received (step S671; Yes), it is determined whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is “1” (step S672). If the hold display number corresponding to the received start winning command is not “1” (in the case of “2” to “4”) (step S672; No), is the execution prohibition condition for the pre-reading notice established? Is determined (step S673). The execution prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the execution of the pre-reading notice. Here, the winning determination result specifying command included in the newly received start winning command specifies “no determination”. When there is a determination of “big hit determination” in the variable display executed before the target (the contents of the command buffer at the start winning prize are checked and the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is before Each winning prize determination result designation command of the hold display number of each, or each winning prize judgment result designation stored in the second start prize command buffer when the newly received start prize command is the first start prize command This is a condition that is satisfied when there is a command that specifies a determination result at the time of winning a “big hit determination” in the command).

  When the execution prohibition condition of the pre-reading notice is not satisfied (step S673; No), it is determined whether the first hold change effect is scheduled to be executed (step S674A). For example, when the stored contents of the first start winning command buffer and the second starting win command buffer are checked and the first hold change effect information is stored in any of the command buffers, the first hold change effect is displayed. It is determined that it is scheduled to be executed (step S674A; Yes).

  When the first hold change effect information is not stored in any of the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer, and the first hold change effect is not scheduled to be executed (step S674A; No), prefetching It is determined whether or not the chance eye is scheduled to be executed (step S674B). For example, the stored contents of the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer are checked, and when the prefetch chance information is stored in any of the command buffers, the prefetch chance is scheduled to be executed. (Step S674B; Yes).

  If the pre-read chance information is not stored in either the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer and the pre-read chance is not scheduled to be executed (step S674B; No), the pre-read chance is executed. Whether or not there is is determined (step S675).

  In step S675, the VDP of the display control unit 31 is first updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter or the like (a counter provided in a VRAM or the like, in which a random number value is updated by an effect random number update process). Numerical data indicating a random number SR1 for determining whether or not to execute the eye is extracted. Subsequently, based on the random number SR1, the presence / absence of execution of a prefetch chance is determined with reference to a prefetch chance execution execution table stored and prepared in advance in CGROM or the like.

  In the look-ahead chance execution determination table, for example, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value SR1 varies depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command (the determination ratio of FIG. 30 is realized). In such a numerical range), it is only necessary to be assigned to “no execution”, “prefetch chance eye A”, and “prefetch chance eye B” as the determination results.

  In this embodiment, two types of prefetch chance eyes are prepared, one of which is “prefetch chance eye A” and the other is “prefetch chance eye B”. The “prefetch chance eye A” and the “prefetch chance eye B” have different target big hit expectations and different chances of stopping (as shown in FIG. 19, the prefetch chance eye A has an even number of predetermined chance eyes. The odd-numbered predetermined chance stops at the look-ahead chance B.) In addition, when the chance eye is stopped, the decorative design may be made to emit light. In this case, the “prefetch chance eye A” and the “prefetch chance eye B” are distinguished from each other by using different emission colors. You may make it do.

  The VDP of the display control unit 31 uses a prefetch chance if the decision result assigned to the decision value that matches the random value SR1 extracted this time according to the winning determination result is “no execution” in the prefetch chance execution decision table. If it is determined that the eye is not to be executed, it is determined that the prefetch chance eye A is executed if it is “prefetch chance eye A”, and the prefetch chance eye B is executed if it is “prefetch chance eye B” (the determination result is VRAM). It may be stored in a predetermined area, etc. The same applies to other decisions).

  As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 30, when the winning determination result is “big hit determination”, it is easier to determine “prefetch chance item B”, “prefetch chance item A”, and “no execution”. The reverse is true for “losing judgment”. For this reason, the big hit expectation is the highest when the “prefetch chance eye B” is executed, and is the lowest when the prefetch chance eye is not executed. In this way, the prefetch chance eye notifies that the target jackpot expectation is high, and the prefetch chance eye B predicts that the prefetch chance eye A is higher than the prefetch chance eye A.

  After step S675, whether or not to execute the first hold change effect is determined (step S676). In step S676, the VDP of the display control unit 31 first extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR2 for determining whether or not to execute the first hold change effect updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter or the like. Subsequently, based on the random value SR2, the presence or absence of execution of the first hold change effect is determined with reference to a first hold change effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in CGROM or the like.

  In the first pending change effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value SR2 varies according to the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command (the determination ratio in FIG. 31). As long as it is assigned to “No execution”, “Hold → Blue”, and “Hold → Red”.

In this embodiment, two types of first hold change effects are prepared, and one of them is an effect of changing the color of the stored image from white (normal color) to blue ("hold → blue" effect). , Hereinafter referred to as a first hold change effect (blue)), and the other is an effect of changing the color of the hold stored image from white to red (“hold → red” effect, hereinafter, the first hold change effect). Also called (red).
). Special symbols are common to both.

  If the determination result assigned to the determination value matching the random value SR2 extracted this time in accordance with the determination result at the time of winning is “no execution” in the first hold change effect execution determination table, the display control unit 31 is the first. It is decided not to execute the hold change effect, and if “hold → blue”, it is determined to execute the first hold change effect (blue), and if “hold → red”, the first hold change effect (red) is executed. Then decide.

  As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 29, when the winning determination result is “hit determination”, it is easier to determine “hold → red”, “hold → blue”, and “no execution”. The opposite is true for "determination". For this reason, the jackpot expectation is highest when the “first hold change effect (red)” is executed (that is, when the hold display image turns red), and the “first hold change effect (blue)”. Is executed next (that is, when the hold display image turns blue), and is lowest when the first hold change effect is not executed. As described above, the first hold change effect changes the display color of the hold display image to notify that the target (the variable display corresponding to the hold display image) has a high jackpot expectation, and holds the hold display image. It is foretold that the expectation level for jackpot is higher when the color changes to red than when the hold display image changes to blue.

  After step S676, the VDP of the display control unit 31 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the prefetch chance item B and the first hold change effect by steps S675 and S676 (step S677) and determines to execute both. If yes (step S677; Yes), the presence / absence of cancellation of the first hold change effect is determined (step S678).

  In step S678, the VDP of the display control unit 31 first extracts numerical data indicating a random value SR3 for determining whether or not to cancel the first pending change effect updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter or the like. Subsequently, based on the random value SR3, the presence / absence of cancellation of the first hold change effect is determined with reference to the cancellation determination table prepared and stored in advance in CGROM or the like.

  In the cancellation presence / absence determination table, for example, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR3 is assigned to “execution cancellation” and “no cancellation” that are determination results in a numerical range that realizes the determination ratio of FIG. It only has to be.

  The VDP of the display control unit 31 determines to cancel the execution of the first hold change effect if the determination result assigned to the determination value that matches the random value SR3 extracted this time is “execution cancellation” in the cancellation determination table. If it is “no cancel”, it is determined not to cancel the execution of the first hold change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 32, when it is determined to execute the first hold change effect and the prefetch chance, the execution of the first hold change effect is canceled at a high rate.

  If it is determined that neither the pre-reading chance item B nor the first hold change effect is to be executed (step S677; No), after step S678, the above determination result is used as the first start winning command buffer or the second start. In the winning command buffer, a record corresponding to the hold display number of the new start winning command is recorded (step S679).

  For example, when it is determined that the prefetch chance eye A is to be executed, information indicating that the prefetch chance eye A is executed (for example, “prefetch chance eye A”) is recorded as the prefetch chance eye information. For example, when it is determined to execute the prefetch chance eye B, information indicating that the prefetch chance eye B is executed (for example, “prefetch chance eye B”) is recorded as the prefetch chance eye information.

  When it is determined that the prefetch chance eye is not executed, the prefetch chance eye information is not recorded, but information indicating that the prefetch chance eye is not executed (also information indicating that the prefetch chance eye information is not stored). .) May be stored in the storage area for the prefetch chance information.

  When it is determined that the first hold change effect (blue) is to be executed, information indicating that the first hold change effect (blue) is to be executed (for example, “hold → blue”) is changed to the first hold change. Recorded as performance information. For example, when it is determined to execute the first hold change effect (red), information indicating that the first hold change effect (red) is executed (for example, “hold → red”) is changed to the first hold change. Recorded as performance information. However, when the execution of the first hold change effect is canceled in step S678, the first hold change effect information is not recorded.

  When it is determined that the first hold change effect is not executed or when there is the cancellation, the first hold change effect information is not recorded, but information indicating that the first hold change effect is not executed (the first 1 holding change effect information may also be stored in the storage area of the first hold change effect information.

  If the prefetch chance is scheduled to be executed (step S674B; Yes), whether or not the second hold change effect is executed is determined (step S681).

  In step S681, the VDP of the display control unit 31 first extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for determining whether or not to execute the second hold change effect updated by a random number circuit or an effect random counter or the like. Subsequently, on the basis of the random value SR4, whether or not the second hold change effect is executed is determined with reference to a second hold change effect execution determination table (FIG. 31) prepared and stored in advance in CGROM or the like. .

  In the second hold change effect execution determination table, for example, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR4 becomes a determination result in a different range depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command. It may be assigned to “no execution”, “hold → blue”, and “hold → red”.

  In this embodiment, two types of second on-hold change effects are prepared, one of which is an effect of changing the color of the on-hold stored image from white to blue ("hold-> blue" effect, hereinafter the second on-hold Change effect (also referred to as blue)), and the other effect is an effect of changing the color of the reserved storage image from white to red ("hold-> red" effect, hereinafter also referred to as second hold change effect (red). ).

  If the determination result assigned according to the determination result at the time of winning is “not executed”, the VDP of the display control unit 31 is assigned to the determination value that matches the random value SR4 extracted this time in the second hold change effect execution determination table. It is decided not to execute the second hold change effect, and if “hold → blue”, it is decided to execute the second hold change effect (blue), and if “hold → red”, the second hold change effect (red). To execute.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 31, when the winning determination result is “big hit”, it is easy to determine “hold → red”, “hold → blue”, and “no execution” in this order. In the case of the reverse. For this reason, the jackpot expectation is highest when the “second hold change effect (red)” is executed (that is, when the hold display image turns red), and the “second hold change effect (blue)”. Is executed next (that is, when the hold display image is red), and is lowest when the second hold change effect is not executed. In this way, the second hold change effect notifies that the target (the variable display corresponding to the hold display image) has a high jackpot expectation by changing the display color of the hold display image, and the hold display image. It is foretold that the expectation level for jackpot is higher when the color changes to red than when the hold display image changes to blue.

  After step S681, it is determined whether or not the execution of the second hold change effect has been decided (step S682). If it is decided to execute the second hold change effect (step S682; Yes), the determined type is determined. The second hold change effect is executed (step S683). For example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 31 or the like, the target hold display image (the hold corresponding to the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is received) The second reserved change effect is executed by changing the color of the (display image). When the second hold change effect (blue) is executed, the target hold display image is changed to blue, and when the second hold change effect (red) is executed, the target hold display image is changed to red.

  Thus, the second hold change effect is executed immediately after the display of the hold display image (appears to appear to have started display of the hold display image in the color after the second hold change effect is executed). On the other hand, the first hold change effect is not executed immediately after the hold display image is displayed, but is executed by variable display started after that (details will be described later). The color after changing the color of the hold display image in the first hold change effect is the same as the color after changing the color of the hold display image in the second hold change effect. The same is true for the first on-hold change effect and the second on-hold change effect in that the presence / absence of execution of the special symbol and the execution timing are different and the on-hold display image is changed.

  After step S679, after step S683, when the hold display number is “1” (step S672; Yes), when the execution prohibition condition for the prefetch notice is satisfied (step S673; Yes), the first hold change effect is executed. When there is a plan (step S674A; Yes), when no new start winning command is received (step S671; No), when it is determined not to execute the second hold change effect (step S682; No), The prefetch notice setting process is terminated.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, look-ahead chance B> first hold change effect (red) and second hold change effect (red)> first hold change effect (blue) and second hold change effect (blue) > Expectation of jackpot is higher in the order of look-ahead chance A. In addition, when it is determined that the prefetch chance item B and the first hold change effect are executed, the execution of the first hold change effect is likely to be canceled as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is difficult for the pre-reading chance eyes B and the first reserved change effect to be executed for the same target. The first hold change effect is executed with a variable display that is started next, as will be described later. In addition, the prefetch chance is executed in each variable display from the next variable display to be started to the variable display executed before the target, as will be described later. When it is determined to execute the first hold change effect and the look-ahead chance item A with a low expectation degree of jackpot, in the next variable display (first variable display) to be started, a special symbol is displayed at the chance of the pre-read chance. The display is replaced (except for special symbols, a decorative symbol constituting the chance eye corresponding to the type of the prefetch chance eye is derived and displayed), and the color of the target hold display image is changed. 1 Hold change effect is executed with priority.

  Next, the processing in steps S170 to S175 (FIG. 28) will be described.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”.

  In this variable display start waiting process, the VDP of the display control unit 31 is received from the main board 11 as a change start designation command (whether it is received as the header of the second effect control command. The same applies to other commands as appropriate. ) Is received. Note that this determination may be made based on, for example, whether or not the first or second variation start designation command reception flag controlled in the second effect control command analysis or the like is in an on state. The same applies to the case where the presence / absence of reception of other commands is confirmed. For example, the presence / absence of reception of the command may be confirmed based on the state of the reception flag corresponding to the command to be confirmed.

  When the change start designation command is received, the variable display start waiting process is performed after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” in order to start the variable display of the decorative symbols in synchronization with the start of the special figure game. Ends. If the variable start designation command has not been received, the variable display start waiting process is terminated as it is.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing.

  In the variable display start setting process, the VDP of the display control unit 31 first shifts the stored contents of the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer and checks the stored contents after the shift (step S321). In the shift of the stored contents, when the first variation start designation command is received, the first start stored in correspondence with the first hold display numbers “2” to “4” in the first start winning command buffer The command at the time of winning, the look-ahead chance information, and the first hold change effect information are shifted to the first hold display numbers “1” to “3” of higher rank numbers (corresponding to the first hold display number “1” before the shift). The stored contents are deleted). When the second variation start designation command is received, the second start winning command stored in correspondence with the second hold display numbers “2” to “4” in the second start winning command buffer, prefetch chance The eye information and the second hold change effect information are shifted to the second hold display numbers “1” to “3” having higher numbers respectively (the stored contents corresponding to the second hold display number “1” before the shift are deleted). )

  After step S321, it is determined whether the pre-read chance information is stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer after the shift (step S323). When the prefetch chance information is stored (step S323; Yes), the current variation pattern (specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area), and the type of the prefetch chance item at this time A chance according to (predetermined chance eye information) is determined as a final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) (step S324). For example, when the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, the reach chance value of “4 2 4” (in the case of “look-ahead chance eye A”) or “5 3 5” (in the case of “the look-ahead chance eye B”) Determine as the final stop symbol. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the non-reach chance of “4 4 2” (in the case of “look-ahead chance A”) or “5 5 3” (in the case of “look-ahead chance B”) The eye is determined as the final stop symbol. After step S324, step S330 described later is executed.

  On the other hand, if the prefetch chance information is not stored (step S323; No), it is determined whether the first hold change effect information is stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer after the shift. Determination is made (step S325).

  When the first pending change effect information is stored (step S325; Yes), the combination of the decorative pattern including the special symbol, which is a combination according to the current variation pattern, is determined as the final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol). (Step S326). For example, when the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, “6 hold 6” or “7 hold 7” is determined as the final stop symbol (which is determined randomly using a random value and a table) do it.). For example, when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, “6 hold 4” or “7 hold 5” is determined as the final stop symbol (which is determined randomly using a random value and a table). Just decide.) “Hold” is a special symbol used in the first hold change effect indicating that the hold changes. As described above, here, symbols other than the special symbols among the decorative symbols constituting the final stop symbol are configured not to form chance chances. That is, the chance break is not determined as the final stop symbol. After step S326, the process of step S331 is performed.

  The chance break is a combination of expecting a chance eye before the final stop symbol stop (before the last decorative symbol stop). In this embodiment, “left” → “right” → “middle”. Since the decorative symbol stops, the “left” decorative symbol (decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L) and the “right” decorative symbol (decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R) of the final stopped symbols. A symbol) is a combination that matches the chance of the look-ahead chance.

  If the first hold change effect information is not stored (step S325; No), the current variation pattern and the current display result (the display result specified by the display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area) The combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to is determined as the final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) (step S327). For example, when the current display result is “big hit”, any one of “4 4 4”, “5 5 5”, “6 6 6”, and “7 7 7” is determined as the final stop symbol. When the current display result is “losing”, if the current fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, one of a plurality of reach-losing combinations prepared in advance is determined as the final stop symbol (which reach-losing combination is selected). Can be determined randomly using a random value and a table.) If the current variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, one of a plurality of non-reach combinations prepared in advance is finally stopped. It is determined as a symbol (which non-reach combination may be determined randomly using a random value and a table). Here, the reach failure combination and the non-reach combination that can be determined as the final stop symbols include the chance break (the chance eyes themselves are excluded). As a result, when the “left” stop symbol and the “right” stop symbol are stopped, if the stop symbol constitutes a part of the chance eye, the chance eye is established (step S324). (When it is executed) and when it is not established (when step S327 is executed) can be present (the chance eye can be prevented from being determined at the timing when the symbol stops at “left” and “right”) ( Especially for non-reach))).

  When the final stop symbol is determined at random, it may be determined such that the big hit expectation is higher when the odd number of decorative symbols are stopped than when the even number of decorative symbols are stopped.

  In step S330, it is determined whether or not the first hold change effect information is stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer after the shift.

  When the first hold change effect information is stored (step S330; Yes), and after step S326, it is determined to execute the first hold change effect of the type indicated by the first hold change effect information ( Step S331). In step S331, among the final stop symbols determined in step S324 or S326, the stop symbol at the “middle” position is replaced with a special symbol (if the symbol has already become a special symbol by the process of step S326, no replacement is required). If the first hold change effect information indicates that the first hold change effect information (blue) is to be executed, the hold display image (target of the target) corresponding to the hold display number corresponding to the first hold change effect information. When it is determined that the first hold change effect that changes the hold display image) to blue is executed, and the first hold change effect information indicates that the first hold change effect (red) is executed, the first hold change effect is displayed. It is determined to execute the first hold change effect for changing the hold display image (target hold display image) corresponding to the hold display number corresponding to the information to red. Thereafter, the first hold change effect information is deleted (step S332). Thus, the first hold change effect is executed only by the variable display that is executed first after the execution of the effect is determined.

  After step S332, after step S327, if the first pending change effect information is not stored (step S330; No), the effect control pattern according to the current variation pattern, the determination result, etc. Is set as a usage pattern used for variable display (step S333). Specifically, in the form specified by the current variation pattern and in the form of deriving and displaying the final stop symbol determined above (the final stop symbol after replacement when there is a replacement for a special symbol) as the final ornament symbol An effect control pattern for performing variable display of symbols is set as the current usage pattern. If it is determined that the first hold change effect is to be executed, an effect control pattern for executing the determined type of first hold change effect is set as the current use pattern.

  After step S333, the VDP of the display control unit 31 sets, for example, a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern to an initial value in an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area such as a VRAM. Is set as (step S334).

  Then, the variation of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 is started (step S327). At this time, for example, the image display device 5 is controlled based on the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in step S333 (transmission of a video signal, etc., and the same applies to the following control). The variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the apparatus 5.

  Thereafter, update setting of the display of the hold display image is performed (step S336). For example, when the first special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received (when received as the header of the second effect control command), the image display device 5 is controlled to the left of the display area 5H. The leftmost first reserved display image in the area 5Ha is deleted, and each of the other first reserved display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left (when there is one first reserved display image, the first reserved display image Only erasure is performed.) For example, when the second special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received (when received as the header of the second effect control command), the image display device 5 is controlled to the right of the display area 5H. The leftmost second reserved display image in the area 5Hb is erased, and each of the other second reserved display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left (when there is one second reserved display image, the second reserved display image is displayed). Are only deleted).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the high base flag is in an on state (step S337). When the high base flag is in an on state (step S337; Yes), the remaining time is displayed (FIG. 38). Is stored in the second presentation control command (second presentation control command having a variation pattern designation command as a header), and the remaining number of times (the remaining number of executions of variable display that can be executed during the shorter state) is specified. Control to update and display on the image display device 5 is performed (step S338).

  Step S338: When the high base flag is in the off state (step S337; No), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” (step S339), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

  The variable display in-process in step S172 of FIG. 28 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display processing.

  In the variable display in-process, the VDP of the display control unit 31 first determines whether or not the variable display time (special drawing fluctuation time) corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, for example. Is determined (step S551). As an example, in the process of step S551, the timer value of the effect control process timer is decremented by 1, and the data included in the effect control pattern associated with the process timer determination value that is the same value as the timer value decremented by 1 is the end code. It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed.

  If it is not the end code, that is, if the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S551; No), it is determined whether the current is the first hold change effect execution period (step S552). The period may be defined by an effect control pattern or the like (for example, the period is specified by comparing the timer value of the process timer with the effect control pattern. The same applies to other periods hereinafter). When the present is the first hold change effect execution period (step S552; Yes), for example, the VDP of the display control unit 31 executes the first hold change effect included in the currently set effect control pattern. Production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lighting data, etc.) based on the production control execution data associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the production control process timer , Effect operation control for executing the first on-hold change effect (basically, control for displaying the effect image by controlling the image display device 5; however, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp A lamp command or a voice command may be transmitted to the first effect control board 12 in order to execute an effect such as causing 9 or the like to turn on / off. Below, do the same.) For performance motion control. By executing step S552 repeatedly for each timer interruption, execution of the first hold change effect is realized.

  In the first hold change effect, the display color of the target hold display image is changed after temporarily stopping the final stop symbol including the special symbol (for example, stopping while slightly swinging) (FIG. 34). ). The final stop symbol that has been temporarily stopped then stops completely, and the variable display ends (step S572 described later). In this way, in the first reserved change effect, the special symbol stops early due to the temporary stop even when the first reserved change effect is not executed, so the period during which the reserved display symbol is changed before the final stop symbol is derived. Can be secured. When the first hold change effect is executed, the stop timing (temporary stop timing) of decorative symbols other than special symbols (decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) is It may be the same as when the first hold change effect is not executed. Also, the special symbol stop timing may be the same as when the first hold change effect is not executed (in this case, the stop timing is the final stop symbol stop timing in step S572, which will be described later).

  After step S553, if the current is not the first hold change effect execution period (step S552; No), the VDP of the display control unit 31 determines whether the current is the reach effect execution period (step S554). The execution period may be defined by an effect control pattern or the like. When it is the execution period (step S554; Yes), the display control unit 31 includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, audio) included in the currently set effect control pattern for executing the reach effect. Control operation, lighting data, etc.) is performed based on the effect control execution data associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step S555). By executing step S555 repeatedly for each timer interruption, execution of reach effect is realized.

  After step S555, or when it is not the reach effect execution period (step S554; No), the VDP of the display control unit 31 controls other effect operation control according to the currently set effect control pattern (for example, decorative pattern For example, effect operation control for executing variable display is performed (step S556). After step S556, the variable display in-process is terminated.

  When the data corresponding to the timer value decremented by 1 in the process of step S551 is an end code, and the special figure variation time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (also a special figure game) (step S551; Yes) ), It is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command has been received (whether or not it has been received as a header of the second effect control command) (whether or not the corresponding reception flag is on, etc.) (step S571). At this time, if the command is not received (step S571; No), the variable display in-process is terminated and waits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command after the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a predetermined error processing is performed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation designation command normally. May be executed.

  If a symbol confirmation designation command is received in step S561 (step S571; Yes), for example, the image display device 5 is controlled to derive and display a final stop symbol that is a variable display result in variable display of decorative symbols. (Step S572). The final stop symbol is the final stop symbol determined in step S171 (including the special symbol when the special symbol replacement process is performed). When the final stop symbol is the chance of the prefetch chance, the prefetch chance is executed by stopping the chance. When the first hold change effect is being executed, the final stop symbol that is temporarily stopped (decorative symbols including a combination of special symbols) is completely stopped and the stop symbol is determined (for example, the swing is stopped to completely Stop). The control content of the derivation display only needs to be defined by, for example, the production control pattern. For example, the final stop symbol data is stored in a VRAM or the like, and the final stop symbol is derived and displayed based on the stored data. May be. After step S572, a timer value corresponding to the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set in the effect control process timer or the like (step S573). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S574), and the variable display process is ended.

  In step S572, the special symbol may be stopped for the first time. In this case, the hold display image may be changed after the variable display ends.

  By repeatedly executing step S172 for each timer interruption, execution of various effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols, a first hold change effect, and a reach effect is realized.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”.

  In the waiting process per special figure, the VDP of the display control unit 31 determines whether or not a hit start designation command has been received (whether or not it has been received as a header of the second effect control command). If it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, execution setting for the big hit effect (the effect executed during the big hit game state) is performed. The big hit effect is an effect from the start of the fanfare to before the ending among the effects executed during the big hit gaming state. In the execution setting of the big hit effect, for example, the production control pattern for executing the big hit effect is set as the use pattern, and the timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern set as the use pattern is set as the effect control process. Set to timer. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, and the waiting process per special figure is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has not yet been received, it is determined whether the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed. For example, 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the effect control process timer, and it is determined whether the timer value obtained by subtracting 1 is “0”, thereby determining the elapse of the waiting time. If the timer value after subtraction of 1 is not “0”, the hit waiting designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed, so this processing is terminated.

  If the timer value after subtracting 1 is “0”, it means that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has elapsed, so it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “losing” The value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value, and this process is terminated.

  The hitting process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”.

  In the hit process, the VDP of the display control unit 31 is the same as the timer value after decrementing the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1 and subtracting 1 from the data included in the effect control pattern set as the usage pattern. The effect operation control is performed based on the effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lighting data, etc.) associated with the process timer determination value.

  In the hit processing, it is further determined whether a hit end designation command has been received (whether it has been received as a header of the second effect control command). If no hit end designation command has been received, all round games are completed. Therefore, the hit process is terminated without updating the value of the production process flag. Further, when the winning end designation command is received, all the round games are ended, and therefore the value of the effect process flag is “5” corresponding to step S175 in order to start execution of the ending effect. The process is updated to "" and the hit processing is terminated.

  At the time of the update, an effect control pattern for executing the ending is set as a use pattern, and a timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer. The ending effect control pattern may be set in advance.

  By repeatedly executing step S174 (especially the above-described effect operation control) for each timer interruption, the execution of the big hit effect set to be executed in step S173 is realized.

  The ending process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”.

  In the ending process, the VDP of the display control unit 31 determines whether the ending execution period has elapsed. For example, the timer value of the production control process timer is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the data included in the production control pattern that is associated with the process timer judgment value that is the same value as the 1 subtracted timer value is an end code. To determine whether the ending period has elapsed.

  When the data included in the effect control pattern is not an end code and the ending execution period has not elapsed, the timer value after decrementing 1 in the data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lighting data, etc.) associated with the process timer determination value that is the same value as the above, the ending production operation control is performed, and this processing is terminated. When the data included in the effect control pattern is an end code and the ending execution period has elapsed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value, and this process ends.

  By repeatedly executing step S175 for each timer interruption, it is possible to execute the ending effect set to be executed in the hit process.

  In the above series of processing, when the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value, one variable display or the like has been completed, so the production control process timer and various flag states Various data such as counters and counter values (those that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) may be reset as appropriate.

(Production screen etc.)
An example of the effect screen realized by the series of processes will be described.

  First, the prefetch chance eye will be described with reference to FIG. After execution of the prefetch chance is determined (after the target is suspended), when the next variable display is started (FIG. 35A, the suspended display image T is the target), the prefetch chance is performed thereafter. The eyes are executed. If the next variable display is non-reach, the non-reach chance (5 5 3) is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) (FIG. 35B). Thereafter, the next variation (next variable display) is started (FIG. 35C). If reach is established in the variable display, the reach chance (5 3 5) is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) (FIG. 35D). Thereafter, target fluctuation (variable display) is started (FIG. 35E). As described above, the chance eye is derived and displayed in each variable display before the target, whereby the prefetch chance eye is executed (in FIG. 35, the prefetch chance eye B is executed).

  Next, the first reserved change effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the next variable display (FIG. 36 (A)) after the execution of the first hold change effect is decided (after the target hold occurs), the final stop symbol including the special symbol is temporarily stopped before receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. (FIG. 36B). At this time, it is assumed that the symbols are not completely stopped by swinging or the like. Thereafter, the display color of the hold display image T as the target changes to red or blue (FIG. 36C), and then the final stop symbol including the special symbol is completely stopped and fixed as the stop symbol (FIG. 36 ( D)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the relationship between the first reserved change effect and the prefetch chance eyes B will be described. In this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the first hold change effect and the prefetch chance B for the same target, the execution of the first hold change effect is canceled with high probability (step S678 and the like). On the other hand, the final stop symbol of the variable display of the decorative symbol at the time of execution of the first hold change effect does not break the chance unless it is executed together with the prefetch chance item B (steps S331, S326, etc.). As described above, in most cases, the first reserved change effect is not executed together with the look-ahead chance item B. Therefore, the ratio at which the final stop symbol at the time of execution of the first reserved change effect is a chance item is not lost. Lower than percentage. As described above, in this embodiment, look-ahead chances are displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (the “middle” decorative symbol display area where the special symbol stops is different from 5C). When the decorative symbol constituting the chance chance of B is stopped and displayed (when there is a possibility that the chance eye of the pre-reading chance eye B is generated) (FIG. 35A), the chance eye of the pre-reading chance eye B is the final stop symbol. The possibility of being derived and displayed as (the chance that the prefetch chance item B is established) may be derived and displayed as the final stop symbol with the chance break combination including a special symbol without the chance item being established. (Figs. 35B and 35C). From another point of view, when a special symbol is displayed, the decorative symbols (here, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that constitute the chance eye of the pre-reading chance eye B are displayed. It can be said that the possibility that the decorative pattern (displayed) is stopped is low.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times is displayed in the time-short state, and the displayed number decreases every time variable display is executed.

(Other example 1)
Note that when the prefetch chance item B is executed, the first hold change effect may not be executed. In this case, for example, when the VDP of the display control unit 31 determines to execute the prefetch chance item B in the process of step S675 of FIG. 29, the process of step S676 and the like are not performed and the prefetch chance item is not performed. Alternatively, when it is determined to execute the prefetch chance eye A, processing such as step S676 is performed. In such a case, steps S677 and S678 may be omitted. In such a case, the chances of the prefetch chance eye B in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (the “middle” decorative symbol display area where the special symbol stops is different from 5C). When the decorative symbol constituting the symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of chance breaks including the special symbol is prohibited from being derived and displayed as the final stopped symbol. When the special symbol is displayed, the decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) that make up the chance symbol of the pre-reading chance item B are not stopped. It can be said that.

(Other example 2)
Further, when the first hold change effect is executed, the prefetch chance eye may not be executed. In this case, the VDP of the display control unit 31 first determines whether or not to execute the first hold change effect. Thereafter, whether or not to execute the prefetch chance is determined when the first hold change effect is not executed. Thus, in this example, when the special symbol is displayed, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye of the prefetch chance eye B are not stopped. Ornaments that constitute the chances of the pre-reading chance in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (the “middle” decorative symbol display area where the special symbol stops is different from 5C). It can also be said that when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of chance breaks including the special symbol is prohibited from being derived and displayed as the final stop symbol.

(Effects of the above embodiment 1)
In the above-described embodiment and the like, when the decorative symbols constituting the chance symbol of the prefetch chance are stopped in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (the chance eye can be derived and displayed) When there is a possibility, the execution (stop of special symbol) of the first reserved change effect is limited (including the reduction of the execution rate as described above, and the prohibition of setting the execution rate to “0”). The same applies to (Fig. 37). Further, when the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye of the pre-reading chance item B are stopped in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (the chance item may be derived and displayed). At that time, the execution of the first reserved change effect (stop of the special symbol) is restricted (FIG. 37, etc.). When the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye of the pre-reading chance eye B other than the special symbol stop position (“middle” decorative symbol display area 5C) are “left” and “right” decorative symbols. Stopping in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R is restricted (FIG. 37, etc.). For this reason, when there is a possibility that the look-ahead chance (especially the look-ahead chance B) is executed, the first hold change effect having a lower jackpot expectation than the look-ahead chance B is executed, and the player is discouraged. Can be suppressed (including prevention and mitigation).

  In addition, when the prefetch chance eye is executed, the execution of the first hold change effect targeting another hold memory is restricted, so that the special symbol is stopped by another opportunity and the prefetch chance eye is not executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

(Effects of the above embodiment 2)
In the above-described embodiment and the like, only when a specific command is transmitted from the first effect control board 12 to the second effect control board 30 as a header of the second effect control command, the checksum is transmitted. For this reason, it is not necessary to calculate the checksum for every command, so the processing load is reduced. In addition, the information on the remaining short time managed by the first effect control board 12 is included in the second effect control command together with the first effect control command and transmitted to the second effect control board 30 together. In general, when information of the same data amount is transmitted, the processing load is less when it is transmitted once than when it is transmitted a plurality of times. In this embodiment, since the information on the remaining number of time reductions is transmitted together with the first effect control command, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the information on the remaining number of time reductions and the first effect control command are individually transmitted.

  In this embodiment, when the VDP of the display control unit 31 rises, a rise signal is sent from the VDP to the first effect control board 12 to notify the rise. The image processing system VDP may start up slowly, but as described above, the first effect control board 12 is notified of the start-up, so that the first effect control board 12 can grasp the rise and before the VDP starts up. The inconvenience that the first effect control board 12 starts normal operation can be solved. Moreover, since the range which the numerical data of a high-order and a low-order can take for the 1st production control command differs, the high-order and low-order of the said command can be grasped | ascertained clearly. Further, since the VDP of the display control unit 31 periodically transmits a normal operation signal to the first effect control board 12, it is possible to monitor whether the VDP is operating normally on the first effect control board 12 side. When the VDP of the display control unit 31 receives the second effect control command with the checksum, the VDP checks the consistency of the command based on the checksum, and receives a command reception signal (matching ) Or (non-matching) is transmitted to the first effect control board 12 and the first effect control board 12 cannot receive the command reception signal after transmitting the second effect control command with the checksum. A reset signal is supplied to the 31 VDP. By doing in this way, the 1st effect control board 12 side can specify whether the transmitted command is abnormal or the 2nd effect control board 30 (VDP) is abnormal. Then, on the first effect control board 12 side, different processing (whether the abnormality or the abnormality is a command abnormality depends on whether the transmission command is abnormal or the second effect control board 30 (VDP) is abnormal). It may also be a process for notifying whether the VDP of the control board 30 is abnormal or the like.

(Effects of the above embodiment 3)
In the above-described embodiment, the VDP of the display control unit 31 of the second effect control board 30 can be reset in an abnormal state or the like by a short reset. For this reason, it can return from abnormality appropriately. Further, since a long reset is performed when a rising signal is not transmitted when the power is turned on, the VDP can be reset even if the VDP is abnormal when the power is turned on. For this reason, it can return from abnormality appropriately. In addition, when the VDP is at a high temperature, the VDP may not be restored to the normal state even if a short reset is performed once. Thus, even if the short reset is performed, when the VDP is still abnormal (when the rising signal cannot be received for 10 seconds after the reset), the long reset is performed. Thereby, during this period, it is possible to prevent the VDP from performing a burdensome process (that is, the VDP can be suitably operated), and it is possible to effectively promote the return from the abnormality of the VDP. . For example, when the VDP reaches a high temperature, the operation of the VDP can be stopped until the VDP cools down, whereby execution of a process with a heavy load can be prohibited, and cooling of the VDP can be promoted. This embodiment is particularly effective when VDP becomes high temperature and thermal runaway occurs. Note that a long reset may be performed when a normal operation signal cannot be received for a VDP that has risen normally. However, in this embodiment, when a normal operation signal cannot be received, a short reset is performed once, and then a rise is performed. A long reset is performed when a signal cannot be received. Thereby, for example, when a normal operation signal is not normally input due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent a long reset from being performed at a timing that is not inherently abnormal, and a long reset can be performed at an appropriate timing.

  In this embodiment, the VDP operation is stopped for a certain period (long term) by performing a long reset by a reset signal used when resetting the VDP (usually used by any processor). Therefore, the operation of the VDP can be stopped by simple processing (recovery from thermal runaway or the like can be performed by simple processing).

  Further, since the cooling fan 40 is operated during the long reset, the cooling of the VDP can be promoted.

(Configuration etc. taking at least a part of the above embodiment as an example)
Next, although the structure etc. which take at least one part of the said embodiment etc. as an example are demonstrated, the following structure may be abbreviate | omitted partly suitably and only one part is employ | adopted and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is comprised May be.

(Configuration 1)
When a variable display (for example, a variable display of decorative symbols) is executed and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a decisive decorative symbol of a jackpot combination is derived and displayed), a specific state (for example, advantageous for the player) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to a big hit gaming state, etc.
Specific display means (for example, the display control unit 31 for displaying the hold display image) for displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display image) corresponding to the variable display;
Change effect execution means (for example, step) for executing a change effect (for example, a first hold change effect) for changing the display mode of the specific display after stopping special identification information (for example, a special symbol) in variable display Display control unit 31 for executing S172),
Preliminary effect execution means (for example, step S172) is executed to stop the variable display in a specific manner (for example, chance eyes) and to execute a notification effect (for example, prefetch chance eyes) for notifying the expected degree of establishment of the predetermined condition. Display control unit 31 and the like)
Change control execution limiting means for limiting execution of the change effect (for example, steps S677, S678, and other example 2 processes, etc.) in a state where variable display may stop due to the specific mode. Part 31),
A gaming machine comprising

  Note that the specific display may be an active display (for example, a display representing a variable display being executed) displayed corresponding to the variable display being executed. For example, a display area for displaying the active display may be provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the hold display image to be executed is moved to the display area and displayed as the active display. That is, the active display may be one in which the hold display image is moved (at this time, the display mode may be taken over). Note that the active display may be terminated while the corresponding variable display is being performed, may be displayed until the end of the variable display, or may be disappeared and displayed again.

  The display mode of the specific display may be the shape, size, flashing / non-flashing, presence / absence of characters and symbols, etc. in addition to the display color.

  The stop of the special identification information (special symbol) includes a temporary stop as well as a complete stop (derived display). For example, when the specific display is active display, the special identification information may be temporarily stopped (for example, temporary stop in the pseudo continuous fluctuation) in the change effect to change the display mode of the active display (in this case, For example, in addition to the pre-reading determination result, at the start of the change, a change effect based on the change pattern and the variable display result (in this case, the change effect is, for example, the big hit expectation degree of the variable display being executed (expected expectation of establishment of predetermined condition), The presence / absence of execution and the type thereof (the type of change effect to be executed, the display mode of the specific display, etc.) may be determined. Even when the specific display is an on-hold display image, the special identification information may be temporarily stopped to change the display mode of the active display. Such a thing should just be prescribed | regulated by the production | presentation control pattern etc. The special identification information (the above special symbol) does not change from usual, but may appear for the first time at the time of stoppage (including a predetermined period before stoppage) in the variable display (the special symbol in the above embodiment). The same applies to). Identification information (including special identification information) that is temporarily stopped or completely stopped by variable display (variable display of identification information) may vary from the beginning of variable display, or may appear in the middle. May be.

  Note that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is a temporary stop for variable display of decorative symbols (the symbol that is temporarily stopped does not have to be a symbol that was changing during variable display, but a symbol dedicated to temporary stop is used) It is an effect that resumes the variable display. The pseudo-ream may be specified by a variation pattern, or the presence or absence of execution may be determined on the first effect control board 12 side. Note that the pseudo-ream generally has a higher degree of big hit expectation as the number of temporary stops increases.

  In the above, the special identification information is the special symbol “K”, but may be other identification information (character, graphic, etc.). However, it is desirable that the identification information is different from other identification information that is variably displayed (special decorative design) (for example, it is possible to make the player recognize that the display mode of the specific display is changed) Etc.). A plurality of types of special identification information such as special symbols may be prepared. In this case, depending on the type of special identification information (for example, which of the plurality of types of special symbols is used for stopping) The type of special identification information (variation effect type) may be determined so as to vary the degree of establishment expectation (for example, it may be adjusted by a determined value of a table, etc. The same applies in other cases). Even if the special identification information is stopped, there may be a so-called gassing effect pattern that does not change the display mode of the specific display.

  The specific mode in the notice effect may be a chance, and the stop of the specific mode includes a complete stop (derived display) and a temporary stop. In the case of a temporary stop, the notice effect may be a pseudo-ream (an effect that temporarily stops the identification information once and restarts the variable display) or the like. In the pseudo-intermittent temporary stop, the expected success rate of the predetermined condition (such as the jackpot expectation level) in the variable display during execution may be notified in advance (in this case, based on the fluctuation pattern, etc.) Whether or not to execute a temporary stop for the second chance may be determined), and the expected degree of satisfaction of the predetermined condition (such as the big hit expectation degree) in the variable display of the pending target may be notified in advance. The variable display in the notice effect is stopped in a specific mode, for example, the changing identification information is stopped in a specific combination, and is stopped in a combination including special special identification information different from the special identification information. Including.

  The degree of establishment expectation is the ratio of the specific state. Note that the specific state may be a gaming state such as a probability variation state or a short time state, and the expected establishment degree in this case is a probability variation expectation degree or a short time expectation degree. As described above, the degree of establishment expectation may be represented by the degree of expectation that variable display such as execution of super reach will be in a specific mode (expectation that depends on the degree of expectation of establishment of a predetermined condition, etc.).

  Of the special symbol stop in the change effect and the stop in the specific manner in the notice effect, one may be a temporary stop, the other may be a complete stop (derived display), or both may be a temporary stop or a complete stop. In the case of a change effect that completely stops the special identification information, the display mode of the specific display may be changed after the variable display ends. In addition, in the case of a change effect that temporarily stops the special identification information, the display mode of the specific display may be changed before the end of the variable display (before the complete stop), and the display mode of the specific display is changed after the end of the variable display (completely The display mode of the specific display may be changed gradually over a certain period of time before and after the end of variable display (before and after complete stop), or after a predetermined image such as a character is displayed. Or you may.

  Note that the variable display may be to change the identification information and the like at one place in addition to changing the identification information and the like at a plurality of places.

  In the above description, two kinds of notice effects and change effects are prepared, but at least one of them may be one kind or three kinds or more.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the prefetch determination is a determination as to whether or not the variable display result of the target is “big hit”, but may be a determination as to whether or not super reach is executed. (For example, in the winning random number determination process, the determination may be made based on the random value MR3 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 18 and 19). It may be a notice of sex (expectation). The pre-reading notice (especially the above-mentioned notice effect etc.) notifies the possibility of the super-reach etc. being executed (the possibility that the variable display will be in a predetermined form), etc. The degree of expectation to be controlled) (such as the expectation degree of jackpot) may be notified in advance. There is a possibility that super reach or the like may be executed even if the expected degree of satisfaction of the predetermined condition of variable display during execution of the notice effect or the change effect is predicted (eg, the big hit expectation degree) (It is good to decide whether or not to perform the notice effect or change effect based on the variation pattern, etc.) It may be a notice. The pre-reading determination result may be any information that predicts or suggests the degree of expectation that the variable display of the target will be in a specific mode (including jackpot and super reach execution).

  As described above, the change effect execution restriction means is realized by restricting the execution of the change effect by giving priority to the execution of the notice effect, and after determining the presence or absence of the change effect, etc. This is realized by limiting the execution, and is realized by preventing a part of the specific mode from stopping when the change effect is executed (the same applies hereinafter).

  The state in which the variable display may stop in a specific mode (stop by the specific mode) may be a state in which the variable display is a mode that constitutes a part of the specific mode. In particular, when the variable display is to variably display the identification information at a plurality of locations, the state where the variable display may stop in a specific manner is, for example, a part of the plurality of locations (a location where the special identification information does not stop) Etc.) as long as the identification information constituting part of the specific mode is stopped. The state in which the variable display may stop in a specific mode (stop by a specific mode) is a state in which the two decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped (specific mode (chance eye)) in the above embodiment. Reach (tempered state)), for example, one decorative symbol constituting the chance eye may be stopped (in this case, for example, stop including a special symbol in step S326) (For example, when a combination of symbols (which may be temporary stop symbols) is determined, one decorative symbol constituting the chance eye is not determined as a stop symbol).

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, although the variable display may stop in a specific manner (although there is a possibility that the notice effect is executed), the special identification information stops, The player's discouragement that there is no possibility can be suppressed (including mitigation. The same applies to suppression). This can be said particularly when the specific mode is that of the notice effect in which the expected degree of establishment of the predetermined condition is higher than the change effect.

  The special symbol (special identification information) does not have to stop all other identification information (including temporary stop) and stop at the end. For example, the special symbol may be stopped as the second stop symbol (stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R). In this case, it is desirable to understand that a part of the chance eye (specific mode) is constituted by the first stop symbol (stop symbol of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L). For example, when there are only “3 2 1” (for example, the chance eye of the look-ahead chance B) and “1 2 3” (for example, the chance eye of the look-ahead chance A), for example, It can be seen that there is a possibility that a chance eye will be established by stopping “1” or “3”. The state in which the variable display may stop in the specific mode may be, for example, a state at a timing before the special symbol can stop. Further, in the change effect, regardless of the stop of the identification information at a position other than the stop position of the special identification information, the display mode of the specific display is changed by the stop of the special identification information (may be a temporary stop). Alternatively, the display mode of the specific display may be changed based on the fact that all the identification information including the special identification information is stopped (may be temporarily stopped). In addition, the change effect may change the display mode of the specific display when the special symbol (special identification information) stops at a plurality of locations. At this time, the jackpot expectation may be varied depending on the number and combination of special symbols (a combination of display locations and / or a combination of special symbol types).

  In the above-described embodiment and the like, according to the above-described configuration, the change effect execution means causes a plurality of types of change effects (for example, a first hold change effect (blue), a first hold change, and the like to satisfy the predetermined condition. The change effect execution restricting means is expected to fulfill the predetermined condition lower than the expected expectation of the predetermined condition predicted by the notice effect that may be executed. The execution of the change effect is limited (for example, step S677, S678 and step S326, the display control unit 31 that executes the processing of other example 1, and the like).

  According to this configuration, there is a possibility that a notice effect with a high expectation of establishment of the predetermined condition may be executed depending on a state in which the variable display may stop in a specific mode (which may be stopped by the specific mode). In spite of this, the disappointment of the player that the possibility disappears can be suppressed by stopping the special identification information. It should be noted that execution of the change effect with the expected degree of establishment of the predetermined condition that is higher than the expected degree of establishment of the predetermined condition that is predicted by the notice effect that may be executed is not restricted. Alternatively, the degree of restriction may be smaller than in the above case. As a result, it is possible to secure a chance to execute a change effect with a high degree of expectation of establishment and to improve the game entertainment. The execution of the change effect of the expected degree of establishment of the predetermined condition that is higher than the expected degree of establishment of the predetermined condition that is predicted by the notice effect that may be executed is not limited to the execution. Good.

  In the above-described embodiment and the like, according to the above configuration, when the special identification information stops in the variable display, stop restriction means (step limiter) that restricts that the identification information constituting the specific aspect stops at a place where the special identification information does not stop S677, S678, and step S326, the display control unit 31 that executes the processing of other examples 1 and 2, and the like) are configured.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the above-described configuration allows stop restriction means (steps S677, S678, and step S326 or the like to restrict the special identification information from being stopped when the identification information constituting the specific mode is stopped in variable display. In other words, the display control unit 31 and the like for executing the processes of the other examples 1 and 2 are configured.

  As an example of the above-described configuration, the final stop symbol (in particular, the final stop symbol of the loss) may be determined at random at the beginning of step S171 according to the variation pattern. In this case, the final stop symbol may be determined so as not to see the chance except when it is determined to execute the prefetch chance. In addition, when the determined final stop symbol is a chance break, the execution of the first hold change effect may be canceled at a constant rate or without fail. Similarly, for example, the final stop symbol determined in step S326 may be a chance break, and when the chance break occurs, the execution of the first hold change effect is performed at a certain rate or without fail. You may make it cancel. Even if the execution of the first hold change effect is canceled, only the stop of the special symbol may be canceled and the display mode of the hold display image may be changed (change timing may be an appropriate timing such as variable display start). ).

  According to these structures, a player's discouragement can be suppressed for the same reason as the said structure. In particular, when there is a possibility that a notice effect with a high degree of expectation of establishment of a predetermined condition may be executed as in the above configuration, the discouragement of the player can be suppressed by adopting either of the above two configurations.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment and the like, due to the above-described configuration, the notice effect is an effect of notifying the expected degree of establishment of the predetermined condition in a variable display that has not yet started. Can improve the interest of

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment and the like, the specific display corresponds to a variable display that has not started yet, and the notice effect has an expected degree of establishment of the predetermined condition in the variable display that has not started yet. The change effect execution restricting means is the change effect for the specific display corresponding to the variable display other than the variable display that is the target of the notice effect when the notice effect is executed. (For example, the display control unit 31 that executes step S674B) is restricted.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the special identification information is stopped due to another opportunity and the notice effect is not executed. In the above-described embodiment, when the notice effect is executed, the second change effect (second hold change effect) for changing the display mode of the specific display is executed for the other target without stopping the special identification information. Therefore, an opportunity to change the display mode of the specific display can be secured.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Configuration 2)
(1) A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
First control means (for example, the first effect control board 12),
Second control means capable of communicating with the first control means (for example, VDP of the display control unit 31),
The first control unit performs the second control when a period during which predetermined communication with the second control unit cannot be performed (for example, a period during which a rising signal cannot be received) exceeds a specific period (for example, 10 seconds). Supplying a specific signal (for example, a reset signal) to the means continuously over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) (for example, a long reset),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the above embodiment, VDP is adopted as the second control means, but the second control means is a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). It may be a microprocessor for image processing called “”. The second control means may be of any type, and may be one having a built-in program or executing a program stored in a predetermined storage device. Further, in order to execute a process for determining the execution mode of the effect, the CPU, ROM (programs executed by the CPU, data used by the CPU, and the like are stored as part of the second control means or the configuration of other means. Or at least one of RAM (which becomes the main memory of the CPU) and the like may be prepared separately from the VDP or the like. The second control means may be composed of a one-chip processor such as VDP including GCROM.

  The CGROM of the display control unit 31 may be a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a nonvolatile memory such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any recording medium may be used. These storage means may be part of the second control means.

  The predetermined communication may be bidirectional communication (signal transmission / reception, etc.) in addition to transmission of a signal (information) from one to the other as in the above embodiment. For example, the first control means supplies a request signal for requesting transmission of a predetermined signal to the second control means, and the second control means responds to the request signal to the first control means with the predetermined signal (normally Signals output during operation and the like may be transmitted, and transmission / reception of these signals may be performed as predetermined communication (when predetermined communication cannot be performed, for example, the predetermined signal is not transmitted).

  The predetermined communication is reception of a rising signal in the embodiment, but may be reception of a normal operation signal. That is, the long reset may be executed when a normal operation signal cannot be received. Alternatively, the rising signal may be omitted, and the operation of the second control means (VDP of the display control unit 31) may be confirmed using only the normal operation signal (for example, effective when the rising of the second control means is early). In this case, when a plurality of normal operation signals cannot be received (when a normal operation signal cannot be received for a certain period of time occurs a predetermined number (multiple times), or when a short reset is executed a predetermined number of times (multiple times), etc. ), A long reset may be executed. By performing a long reset when a plurality of normal operation signals cannot be received, the possibility of erroneously executing a long reset due to noise or the like can be reduced.

  For example, the predetermined communication may be performed when the second control unit is operating normally, and may be performed when it cannot be performed. The specific period may also be an arbitrary period.

  The specific signal may be another signal other than the reset signal. The specific signal may be a signal that can stop the operation of the second control means by continuously supplying the specific signal. Note that the specific signal may not be low active but may be a high active signal. For example, by setting the reset terminal of the DSP to Low for 60 seconds (for example, measuring 60 seconds with a timer and keeping the voltage level of the reset terminal Low for 60 seconds), a specific signal is continuously generated over a predetermined period. It may be realized to supply. To supply a specific signal continuously over a predetermined period means that a specific signal is continuously supplied a plurality of times without an interval (see the long reset in FIG. 8), that the reset terminal is kept at a low level for a predetermined period. As a result, when a specific signal having a predetermined time width is continuously supplied without an interval, a specific signal is continuously supplied a plurality of times with an interval (see FIG. 42 described later). Reference).

  The specific signal stops the operation of the second control unit in other scenes (including a stop state in which the second control unit does not operate at the time of restarting, such as a case where the second control unit does not operate due to a reset) or causes the second control unit to perform a specific operation. In the predetermined case as described above, by continuously supplying as described above, the operation of the second control unit is stopped for a certain period of time, or the second control unit is made to perform a specific operation constant. It is good to repeat it over a period. By supplying the specific signal continuously over a predetermined period, it is possible to cause the second control means to perform a suitable operation required at that time.

  According to the said structure, a 2nd control means can be operated suitably (it can be made to reset suitably from a thermal runaway etc.).

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as the gaming machine, but a slot machine may be employed as the gaming machine, for example. Further, the first control means and the second control means may be different substrates, different portions (for example, different chips) on the same substrate, or the like. For example, the production control CPU 120 and the display control unit 31 may be provided on the same substrate. The first control means may be the main board 11 and the second control means may be the first effect control board.

(2) The first control unit supplies the specific signal to the second control unit a plurality of times at a predetermined interval (for example, a reset signal having a time width of 1 ms or less is supplied a plurality of times at an interval of 1 ms. Such).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated. In addition to the long reset as shown in FIG. 8, such a configuration may be realized by a reset that intermittently repeatedly transmits a reset signal as shown in FIG. 42 (stopping operations such as VDP). Or an interval at which VDP or the like performs only predetermined processing (such as processing with less burden) and then resets it afterwards.

(3) When the second control means runs out of heat, a period during which the predetermined communication cannot be performed exceeds the specific period.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

(4) The specific signal is a reset signal.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

  The apparatus further includes cooling means (for example, a cooling fan 40) for cooling the second control means during the predetermined period.

(5) According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated. In particular, the second control means can be suitably cooled. The cooling means may be cooled by a refrigerant such as water. In addition, the cooling fan 40 and the like may operate during a period other than the long reset period (the predetermined period). For example, the cooling fan 40 may operate while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operating.

(6) A cooling means (for example, a cooling fan 40) for cooling the second control means is further provided.
The cooling unit may cool the second control unit more strongly in the predetermined period than in a period other than the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 41).

  For example, the first effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can adjust the intensity (rotation speed, etc.) of the cooling fan in a plurality of stages (such as “strong” and “weak”), In some cases, the intensity of the cooling fan may be maximized (FIG. 41, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

(7) Variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) for executing variable display;
Adjustment means (for example, the first effect control board 12 or the like) capable of adjusting the effect setting according to an adjustment operation (for example, volume adjustment or the like) by the player at least during execution of variable display;
Adjustment image display means (for example, the first effect control board 12) that displays an adjustment image (for example, the volume image VL) corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period,
The adjusted image display means makes the adjusted image unrecognizable or difficult to view in a period in which the variable display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 40).
You may do it.

  In this way, the player may be able to adjust the effect setting. As the effect setting, for example, there is a volume of effect sound, brightness of a display screen, and the like. For example, a detection unit (operation button, infrared sensor, camera for detecting the operation, etc.) for detecting the player's motion is provided, and the setting of the effect is adjusted based on the detected motion. For example, a signal indicating the operation detected by the detection unit is transmitted to the first effect control board 12 or the second effect control board 30, and the first effect control board 12 or the second effect control board 30 transmits the signal that has been transmitted. The production setting is changed (adjusted) in accordance with the operation specified by (for example, when a volume adjustment signal is supplied to the second production control board 30, information specifying the volume is included in the voice command). . Moreover, the 1st effect control board 12 or the 2nd effect control board 30 performs an effect by the present effect setting (when there is a change, the effect setting after a change).

  When there is a change in the effect setting, the second effect control board 30 may display the changed effect setting on the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (a signal by volume adjustment or the like is the first signal). When input to the effect control board 12, the volume is notified from the first effect control board 12 to the second effect control board 30). For example, the change of the effect setting may be accepted during the execution of the variable display. In this case, the effect setting image corresponding to the changed effect setting is displayed for a predetermined period during the execution of the variable display. However, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period, the effect setting image is rendered invisible or difficult to view. Thereby, the visibility of the variable display result can be ensured.

  Specifically, when an operation for changing the volume (may be changed in luminance) is performed, the display control unit 31 displays the volume image VL corresponding to the changed volume on the screen of the image display device 5 (the changed volume). (Volume image VL) indicating (when the luminance is changed, an image showing the luminance of the degree of change is displayed) and is deleted after a predetermined period of time (FIGS. 40A to 40C). However, when the variable display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived within a predetermined period (such as when the symbol confirmation designation command is received as the second effect control command), the displayed volume image VL is variable. When the display result is derived, it is deleted (FIGS. 40D to 40E). For example, the volume image VL is deleted before step S572. Note that the volume image VL may be displayed in a semi-transparent display or a reduced display to make it difficult to view. Thereby, the visibility of the variable display result can be ensured. In particular, when the volume image VL is displayed at a position superimposed on the variable display result, if the volume image VL remains displayed, the volume image VL is positioned on the stopped decorative pattern and the stopped decorative pattern (variable) The visibility of the display result is impaired. However, the visibility can be ensured by hiding the volume image VL, making it semi-transparent or reducing the volume.

  Note that the sound volume image VL or the like may be deleted even during the original display period when the temporary stop mode is set by the pseudo-ream or the like.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a decrease in recognizability of the variable display result.

(8) The first control means transmits a command (for example, a first effect control command, etc.)
The second control means receives the command transmitted by the first control means, performs control according to the received command,
The first control means can transmit the command to be transmitted with predetermined information (for example, a checksum) for confirming the consistency of the command to be transmitted,
The second control means can determine the consistency of a command accompanied by the predetermined information based on the predetermined information (for example, the process of step S74).
The first control means transmits the predetermined information along with only a part of specific commands (for example, refer to the specific command in FIG. 4) among the plurality of types of commands that can be transmitted.
You may do it.

  According to this configuration, for example, the processing load on the first control unit and the second control unit can be reduced as compared with the case where predetermined information is added to all commands.

  With the first control means as the main board 11 and the second control means as the first effect control board, only when a specific command of the first effect control commands is transmitted, a checksum is attached and transmitted. Good.

  In the above embodiment, the predetermined information is a checksum, but other error detection codes may be used. Any checksum calculation method can be used. However, as in the above-described embodiment, the predetermined bit is different from the data of the first bit of the predetermined part of the command (which may be the upper byte of the header of the first effect control command or the entire command). By calculating the information, it is preferable to easily distinguish the predetermined part of the command from the predetermined information. In addition, as another example of transmitting the predetermined information along with the predetermined information, the predetermined information and the specific command may be transmitted as one command. Any method for calculating predetermined information such as a checksum can be used.

  It is desirable that the specific command is a command having a high importance in the progress of the game, which needs to confirm consistency particularly in the progress of the game. For example, as a specific command, a power failure recovery command (a command transmitted from the main board 11 to the first effect control board 12 at the time of power failure recovery), a power-on command (sent from the main board 11 to the first effect control board 12 at the time of power failure recovery) Command), a special winning opening opening or closing designation command (a command for notifying that the special winning opening has been opened or closed), and the like. The specific command is preferably a command transmitted in connection with the progress of the game transmitted when the special winning opening is opened or closed, or when the variable display is started. The specific command includes, for example, at least a command (for example, a high importance) command used in the progress of the game (for example, a command used in the progress of the game among a plurality of types of commands that can be transmitted). One or more types of commands (a part of the plurality of types of commands) may be used.By attaching a checksum or the like to such a specific command, the game progresses while misrecognizing the command. (Including the execution of wrong performances), and the prevention of the game's interest can be prevented.In addition, while performing the performance while checking the consistency of the command by checksum etc. The game progresses normally by attaching it only to some types of commands that can be sent checksums, etc. Effect is while guaranteeing that the like) is executed correctly, it is possible to reduce the processing load by calculation or the like, such as a checksum.

  The first control means performs a first calculation (for example, checksum calculation) based on the specific command, transmits the result of the first calculation as the predetermined information, and the second control means When the specific command is received, a second calculation (for example, checksum calculation) is performed based on the received specific command, and the result of the second calculation and the predetermined command associated with the specific command are performed. The consistency of the specific command is determined by comparing with the information (for example, step S784).

  According to this configuration, command consistency can be ensured.

  In addition, what to do when the commands are not consistent is arbitrary. In the above embodiment, the second control means deletes all the currently received commands when the commands are not consistent (in this case, for example, the presentation is not executed for a while until a new command is received). In addition to or instead of this, the execution of the effect is prohibited until a predetermined period elapses (for example, until a new variable pattern designation command is transmitted and execution of a new variable display is started). Alternatively, only inconsistent commands may be deleted. When the effect based on the command is not executed, the second effect control board 30 may display on the image display device 5 that the effect cannot be executed (such as “Please wait for a while”).

  Each of the plurality of types of commands includes upper bits (for example, upper byte data) and lower bits (for example, upper byte data) (for example, FIG. 5), and numerical values that the upper bits can take. The range and the numerical range that the lower bits can take are different (for example, FIG. 4, the numerical range is different between the upper MODE data and the lower EXT data).

  According to this configuration, the second control means can clearly grasp the upper bits and lower bits of the command.

  Especially when the command can be divided into a group of a plurality of bits (8 bits in the above embodiment) as in the above embodiment, the group of the first bit of the command (in the above embodiment, the upper byte of the header) By making the first bit a value different from the first bit of the other group, it is possible to easily distinguish the other bit group from the first bit group. By distinguishing the first bit of the predetermined information from the first bit of the group of the first bit of the command, it is possible to distinguish the predetermined information from the predetermined information. This can be said for all information such as signals and commands exchanged between the substrates.

  When receiving the specific command, the second control means determines the consistency of the received specific command based on the predetermined information accompanying the specific command (for example, step S784), and the specific command is consistent. If the specific command does not match, the first information (for example, command received signal (matching), etc.) is transmitted to the first control means. (Non-matching, etc.) is transmitted to the first control means, and the first control means resets the second control means when neither the first information nor the second information is received. The reset signal to be transmitted is transmitted to the second control means (for example, FIG. 6, steps S719, S702, etc.).

  According to this configuration, an appropriate response can be taken when the second control means is abnormal.

  In addition, the process which a 1st control means performs when receiving 2nd information may be arbitrary. As described in the above embodiment, in addition to deletion of a command or abnormality notification, an effect may not be executed for a certain period.

  The second control means transmits to the first control means a predetermined signal (for example, a rising signal or the like) indicating that the operation is possible when the game machine is operable after the power is turned on (for example, FIG. 6, step S72, etc.).

  According to this configuration, the first control unit can grasp that the second control unit is operable.

  It should be noted that “the second control means is operable” may be a state in which the initial setting or the like is completed and an effect can be executed. The second control means transmits a predetermined signal when it becomes “operable”. When the first control means starts the production control after receiving the predetermined signal, the second control means operates. Even if it takes time to reach a possible state, the production control can be performed appropriately.

  The second control unit transmits an operation confirmation signal (for example, a normal operation signal) indicating normal operation to the first control unit at predetermined intervals (for example, FIG. 6, step S81, etc.). ).

  According to this configuration, the first control means can confirm that the second control means is operating normally.

  Game control means (for example, main board 11 etc.) which controls the progress of the game and transmits a command according to the progress of the game is further provided, and the first control means has a command (for example, a command received from the game control means) A command (for example, a second effect control command, etc.) is added to the information (for example, data indicating the remaining number of time reductions) managed by the first control means to the first effect control command set in the header). To the second control means (FIG. 5, step S757, etc.).

  The information managed by the first control unit may be any information (such as a command stored by the first control unit). For example, the first control means can also determine the presence / absence of execution of the effect and the mode thereof, and the information such as the determined execution / non-execution of the effect as the “information managed by the first control means” is used as the first control means. To the second control means. For example, the second control unit may perform production control (including determination of whether or not to execute a predetermined production) based on information from the first control unit.

  Further, the information managed by the first control means may be data indicating the probability variation remaining count (the second effect control board 30 may display the probability variation remaining count). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an ST machine (for example, the probability variation state is one of certain probability variation end conditions of a predetermined number of special game runs and a next big hit gaming state being started. The first effect control board 12 uses the remaining number of executions of the special figure game until the probability variation end condition is satisfied as the probability variation remaining number. You may count by the same method. For example, in the first effect control board 12, the probability change remaining according to the jackpot type specified by the hit end designation command (a value corresponding to the jackpot type may be set in the EXT data) or the display result designation command. The initial value of the number of times may be set in a counter or the like. In such a case, the upper byte of the footer of the second effect control command may be data indicating the probability variation remaining number, and the lower byte of the footer may be data indicating the remaining time (in the second effect control board 30). , The remaining number of times of probability change and the number of remaining hours may be displayed.) The probability variation remaining time and the remaining time reduction number may be fixed regardless of the jackpot type (may be different depending on the time variation and the probability variation). In this case, the first effect control board 12 sets a fixed value at the end of the big hit. What is necessary is just to set as an initial value of the number of remaining probability changes and the number of remaining time reductions.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the first control unit and the second control unit, rather than transmitting information managed by the first control unit separately from the command.

(Modification)
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment and the like, and a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described embodiment may be solved so that at least one problem in the prior art can be solved. It may have a configuration. Below, the modification of the said embodiment is shown. You may combine at least one part about each of the following modification.

(Modification 1)
The VDP may be naturally cooled without providing the cooling fan 40 or operating the cooling fan even during a long reset.

(Modification 2)
An appropriate time width of the reset signal can be adopted. Alternatively, the VDP of the display control unit 31 may be reset first by supplying a reset signal (short reset) immediately after turning on the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. During the long reset, the first effect control board 12 may execute a necessary process as appropriate in parallel with the long reset process.

(Modification 3)
In the above embodiment, the effect executed on the first effect control board 12 side is executed based on the command from the second effect control board 30 side, but the predetermined effect is on the first effect control board 12. You may perform the determination of the presence or absence of execution, execution of an effect, etc. In the above embodiment, the first effect control board 12 controls the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, and the like. ), The first effect control board 12 may determine whether or not to execute an effect, execute an effect, and the like. As described above, with respect to the effect using the electrical component that can be controlled by the first effect control board 12, execution of the effect or the like may be determined by the first effect control board 12. In addition, a command for executing an effect is supplied to the second effect control board 30 on the first effect control board 12 side, and the second effect control board 30 controls the effect image under the control of the first effect control board 12. May be displayed.

(Modification 4)
The first effect control command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the second effect control board 30 without going through the first effect control board 12. However, the direction through the first effect control board 12 can transmit information to be transmitted from the first effect control board 12 together with the first effect control command or the first effect control, for example, as in the above embodiment. By attaching a checksum or the like on the board 12, it is possible to cope with an erroneous transmission of a command. When the main board 11 and the first effect control board 12 are used, and the second effect control board 30 is a new product, the main board 11 and the first effect control board 12 are used. This makes it possible to use the previously used specifications for the command transmission path from the main board 11 and facilitate the introduction of the second effect control board 30.

(Modification 5)
The main board 11, the first effect control board 12, and the second effect control board 30 may be in serial communication with each other or in parallel communication. A dedicated communication port may be prepared for the reset signal. The second effect control board 30 transmits an audio command and a lamp command for designating an audio output pattern and a lighting pattern for a series of effects to the first effect control board 12 at the start of the effect, and the sound by the first effect control board 12 The effect may be executed by performing the output or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 and the image display by the second effect control board 30 in parallel. In addition, the second effect control board 30 may transmit a voice command or a lamp command designating the mode at every timing of outputting a sound and every timing at which the game effect lamp 9 is turned on.

(Modification 6)
The pachinko gaming machine may be provided with operation means capable of adjusting the sound volume from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting brightness of the game effect lamp 9, the screen brightness of the image display device 5, and the like. In this case, the operation signal of the operation means is supplied to the first effect control board 12, and the first effect control board 12 includes the information specifying the brightness of the screen in the second effect control command. It may be transmitted to the effect control board 30 (or may be transmitted as another command). The second effect control board 30 displays the screen with the brightness specified by the information. It should be noted that at least two of the sound volume, lighting brightness, and screen brightness are included in one command (for example, set separately for a header and a footer) and the second effect control board 12 to the second. You may make it transmit to the production control board 30. FIG. Moreover, you may provide operation means for effects, such as a push button. In this case, the operation signal of the operation means for the effect is supplied to the first effect control board 12, and the first effect control board 12 is included in the second effect control command corresponding to the operation, and the second effect control board. 30 may be transmitted (or may be transmitted as a separate command). The second effect control board 30 executes an effect corresponding to the operation (command). Further, when the first effect control board 12 does not receive a command from the main board 11 until the predetermined period after the power is turned on, the first effect control board 12 performs a predetermined check such as a ROM check or a checksum. As such, the fact may be transmitted as a command from the first effect control board 12 to the second effect control board 30 (in this case, the second effect control board 30 indicates that a ROM check or the like is being performed). You may make it display.) Note that commands and signals exchanged between the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30 may be such that the higher-level information is fixed so that the type of command or information can be easily recognized on the receiving side. . In addition, the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30 may be provided with an LED for confirming the operation. When the power is turned on, the LED is turned on in a predetermined manner (flashing, etc.). (Including) may notify that it is operating normally. In addition, when a command or various signals are received, the LED or the like is turned on in a predetermined manner (including blinking) to visually notify humans of normal operation (such as command transmission / reception). May be.

(Modification 7)
For example, when the second effect control board 30 receives another second effect control command between the header and footer of a certain second effect control command (MODE data (data with the first bit being “1”)). When the data constituting the second presentation control command cannot be received in the original arrangement order, it is all received at the next 1-byte data (data having the first bit of “0”). It is advisable to delete these commands from the buffer or the like so that they are not processed based on these commands. This prevents inconveniences such as executing an incorrect performance. Note that commands that have received data in a normal order may not be deleted, but only commands for data that have been received in an abnormal order may be deleted.

(Modification 8)
In addition, when the short reset process in step S713 or S720 is executed a predetermined number of times (an arbitrary number of times of two or more) within a predetermined period, a notification that the second control means is abnormal may be given. For example, in the first effect control board 12, the second effect control board 30 is abnormal when the process of step S720 is executed a predetermined number of times (any number of times equal to or greater than two) without interposing the process of step S717. (Informing by sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R and / or lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 or the like) may be performed. For example, a counter that counts every time step S720 is executed, and a predetermined counter that resets the count value when step S717 is executed is provided, and notification is given when the counter reaches a predetermined value. Further, in the first effect control board 12, when the short reset process is executed, the elapsed time from the execution timing of the short reset process is measured using a predetermined timer, and the elapsed time to be measured reaches the predetermined period. Thereafter, the number of executions of the short reset process is counted, and when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number, a notification that the second effect control board 30 is abnormal (audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R) (For example, an alarm sound output) and / or a notification by lighting the game effect lamp 9 (flashing, etc.) may be performed (at this time, the elapsed time is measured each time each short reset process is executed). Alternatively, the number of executions of the short reset process may be counted for each elapsed time.

  In addition to the above configuration, for example, the first effect control board 12 receives a normal operation signal without receiving a command reception signal when, for example, an abnormality of the second effect control board 30 is detected a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period. Notification of abnormality (notification by voice output or the like) may be performed. Further, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the abnormality notification may be performed when the abnormality detection reaches a predetermined number of times.

  Further, the abnormality notification mode in each short reset process may be different from the notification mode when the number of short reset processes reaches a predetermined number. Furthermore, the abnormality notification may be performed only when the number of short reset processes reaches a predetermined number without performing the abnormality notification in each short reset process.

(Modification 9)
In the above-described embodiment and the like, according to the above configuration, change effect determining means (for example, the display control unit 31 that executes step S161) that determines whether or not to execute the change effect, and whether or not to execute the notice effect. A notice effect determining means (for example, the display control unit 31 that executes step S161) for determining whether or not the change effect execution restricting means performs the notice effect by the notice effect determining means. When it is determined to be executed, the change effect determining means may be prohibited from determining that the change effect is to be executed (for example, when it is determined to execute the prefetch chance eye, the first pending change effect Do not decide to run). According to this configuration, the process for stopping the special identification information can be facilitated.

(Modification 10)
Further, when the specific display is newly displayed, a display effect executing means (for example, a display control unit 31 for executing the hold display effect) capable of executing a display effect (for example, a hold display effect) associated with the display of the specific display. The display effect executing means executes the display effect accompanying the display of the new specific display when the new specific display is displayed during the execution of the display effect. (See, for example, FIG. 39).

  As the display effect, there is a hold display effect shown in FIG. The hold display effect is an effect of gradually displaying the hold display image. For example, when displaying the hold display image, the display control unit 31 executes a hold display effect that displays the hold display image so that the hold display image gradually appears (for example, the second effect control command analysis). A predetermined control command is sent to the display control unit 31 so as to start execution of the on-hold display effect when control for displaying the on-hold display image is performed in the equal processing, or predetermined control is performed on the display control unit 31 at every timer interruption. Send a command and execute the hold display effect.) Then, during the execution of the hold display effect, when there is a new start prize and a new hold display image is to be displayed, the hold display effect being executed is stopped and the hold display image is displayed, and The hold display effect is executed for the new hold display image (for example, when the control for displaying the new hold display image is performed in the second effect control command analysis or the like, the hold display effect being executed is stopped and finally executed. A predetermined display command is sent to the display control unit 31 so as to display the hold display image of the form and start a hold display effect for the new hold display image, or a predetermined control command is sent to the display control unit 31. The execution of the hold display effect is stopped to display the hold display image in the final form, and a new control display image is displayed on the display control unit 31 for each timer interruption for a new hold display image. Running held display performance by sending a command.). According to this structure, it can suppress that an effect becomes unnatural.

  As described above, the display effect execution means stores a new hold memory (variable display that has not yet been started (for example, hold data for executing variable display) as the hold memory during execution of the display effect. .) Is stored, the display effect being executed is interrupted, and the display effect associated with the display of the new specific display corresponding to the hold storage is executed, so that the status of the hold display (specific display) can be determined. It can be made easier.

(Modification 11)
The variable display (simply variable display) of the identification information (special drawing, decorative design, general drawing, etc.) includes that the identification information blinks. For example, in special drawings and ordinary drawings, a pattern in which all segments are turned off and one pattern in which at least some segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) are alternately included in the variable display of identification information ( In this case, the one pattern (for example, a lost symbol) appears to blink). In addition, variable display may be performed by blinking decorative symbols and ordinary symbols. Further, the identification information variably displayed in the variable display and the identification information as the variable display result may be different. For example, the display of one horizontal bar (“−”) blinks as a variable display of a special figure or an ordinary figure, and the other display (“7” if “big hit”, Deriving and displaying “1” or the like if “lost” is included in the variable display of the identification information. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern. In addition, a mode in which identification information that was not displayed in the initial predetermined period in one variable display is displayed after the predetermined period is included in the variable display of the identification information (the special symbol is a temporary stop of the final stop symbol) It may be a decorative pattern that appears for the first time at times.) The gaming machine only needs to perform variable display, for example.

(Modification 12)
The prefetch determination may be performed on the first effect control board 12 side. For example, a command indicating each random number value at the time of starting winning may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the first effect control board 12 at the time of starting winning, and the first effect control board 12 may perform the prefetch determination.

(Modification 13)
In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the “probability change state” by determining the big hit type at the start of the change, but the opening pattern (round) of the big prize opening is set at the start of the change. The game state after the jackpot gaming state is changed to a “probable change state” based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the jackpot gaming state. You may make it do.

(Modification 14)
In the above embodiment, when a start winning occurs and a new hold occurs, the hold display image is displayed in the second effect control command analysis process or the like, but the hold display image is held in the prefetch advance notice setting process in step S161. A display image may be displayed (when a plurality of holds are generated during the prefetch notice setting process, a hold display image is displayed for each hold). In this case, when it is determined in step S161 to execute the second hold display change effect, the target hold display image may be a color other than white from the start of display (that is, the hold display image is displayed in red or blue). You may want to start.)

(Modification 15)
The hold display image is normally white and changes from white to red or blue by the first hold change effect or the second hold change effect, but when it is determined to execute the prefetch chance eye or the first hold change effect, The display mode of the target hold display symbol may be changed to a special mode (for example, blinking) different from normal so that the player can easily be notified that the hold display image is the target. When a new hold display image is displayed in step S161 as described above, the hold display image may be set to the special mode from the start of display of the target hold display image (in the special mode). The display of the hold display image may be started.)

(Modification 16)
In step S161, the determination result of step S675 or step S676 is held in a VRAM or the like. In step S679, it is determined whether or not there is a cancellation, and the determination result that becomes the first hold change effect information is stored in the command buffer for starting winning (this time It may be stored in the storage area corresponding to the target hold display number). For example, if it is determined in step S678 that there is a cancellation, the determination result stored in the VRAM or the like (determined to execute the first hold change effect) (Determination result at the time) may be rewritten with information indicating that the deletion or the first hold change effect is not executed, and the determination result held in step S679 may be recorded as it is without determining whether or not there is cancellation ( When the decision result when deciding to execute the first hold change effect is deleted, the information is Will not be recorded.).

(Modification 17)
The pre-reading chance pattern may be the same as the stop pattern before the last decorative pattern (decorative pattern at the position where the special symbol stops), regardless of the type of the pre-reading chance pattern. This can improve the interest of the game. In such a case, the discouragement of the player can be prevented by restricting the execution of the change effect as described above regardless of the type of the prefetch chance (expected degree of big hit).

(Modification 18)
In the above embodiment, in order to notify the first production control board 12 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode, such as the variation time, the type of reach production, and the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, one variation pattern command is used when the variation is started. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the change pattern may be notified to the first effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the first effect control board 12 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the first effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

(Modification 19)
In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings (FIGS. 43 to 57).

In the second embodiment, a part or all of the contents already described in the first embodiment will be described again (described in the same or different expression as in the first embodiment), or the first In some cases, the description of a part or all of the content already described in the embodiment is omitted, or in the first embodiment, a part or all of the content that is not described in the first embodiment may be described.
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, different names may be used for the same or similar objects. As an example, the “decorative symbol” in the first embodiment is referred to as “production symbol” in the second embodiment, and the “variation pattern designation command” in the first embodiment is “design variation” in the second embodiment. The “display result designation command” in the first embodiment is referred to as “pattern XX designation command”, and the “display result 1 designation (missing designation) command” “display result 2 designation (normal jackpot designation) command” in the second embodiment. This is referred to as “display result 3 designation (probability change big hit designation) command”, and “first symbol variation start designation command” and “second symbol variation start designation command” in the first embodiment are referred to as “first symbol variation” in the second embodiment. This is referred to as “variation designation command” and “second symbol variation designation command”, and “hit start designation command” in the first embodiment is referred to as “big hit start 1 designation command”. In the first embodiment, the “hit end designation command” in the first embodiment is referred to as “hit end end 1 designation command” and “hit end end 2 designation command” in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the “gaming state designation command” in the form is referred to as the “normal state designation command”, “time-short state designation command”, and “probability change state designation command”, and the “first special figure pending storage number” in the first embodiment The “addition designation command” and the “second special figure reserved memory number addition designation command” are referred to as a “total pending memory number designation command” in the second embodiment, and the “first special figure pending memory number subtraction designation” in the first embodiment. The “command” “second special figure reserved memory number subtraction designation command” is referred to as a “total pending memory number subtraction designation command” in the second embodiment, and the “first winning prize in the first embodiment”. The “judgment result designation command” and “second prize determination result designation command” are referred to as “variation type command” in the second embodiment, and the “prefetching advance notice setting process (step S161)” in the first embodiment is the second. In the embodiment, this is referred to as “prefetching notice processing (step S1500)”, and “variable display start waiting processing (step S170)” in the first embodiment is referred to as “variation pattern command reception waiting processing (step S1800)” in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the “variable display start setting process (step S171)” in the first embodiment is referred to as “production symbol variation start process (step S1801)”, and the “variable display in the first embodiment”. In the second embodiment, “intermediate processing (step S172)” is performed in “production design variation processing (step S1802)” “production design variation suspension”. Stop processing (step S1803) ", and" waiting processing per special figure (step S173) "in the first embodiment is referred to as" big hit display processing (step S1804) "in the second embodiment. The “winning process (step S174)” in the form is referred to as “in-round process (step S1805)” and “post-round process (step S1806)” in the second embodiment, and the “ending process (step S1806)” in the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, “S175)” may be referred to as “hit end effect processing (step S1807)”.
Moreover, although the case where the 1st effect control board 12 and the 2nd effect control board 30 were each provided in 1st Embodiment was demonstrated, in 2nd Embodiment, the 1st effect control board in 1st Embodiment. 12 will be described as an effect control board 12 including a second effect control board 30.

Here, as a gaming machine that is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, there is one that displays an image showing the number of acquired balls every time the number of acquired balls in a big hit becomes a predetermined number (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-754436). ).
However, in the above gaming machines, the aspect of the notification effect is uniform, and the interest of the game in the advantageous state is insufficient.
For this reason, the invention according to the second embodiment has been conceived in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to the second embodiment is as follows.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An effect state control means (for example, an effect state control means (for example, an effect state during a round, etc.) in the advantageous state can be controlled to any one of a plurality of kinds of effect states (for example, A mode or B mode in FIG. 38). , CPU 120 for production control)
A notification effect (for example, a notification effect by the first notification image 204 or the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 38) related to the number of game media (for example, the number of game balls) given during the advantageous state is executed. Notification production means (for example, production control CPU 120, etc.),
The notification production means is
When the production state control means is controlling the first production state (for example, A mode), the notification production according to the first notification mode (for example, the first notification image 204 shown in FIG. 38) is executed.
When the production state control means controls the second production state (for example, the B mode or the like) different from the first production state, a second notification mode (for example, FIG. 38) different from the first notification mode. The notification effect by the second notification image 214 shown) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by the notification effect according to the effect state.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above,
The notification effect means indicates that the number of game media granted during the advantageous state has reached a predetermined number (for example, the total number of game balls acquired exceeds n times 500 as shown in step S1941 in FIG. 41). The notification effect according to the first notification mode (for example, the first notification image 204 shown in FIG. 38) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by diversifying the notification effects.

(3) The gaming machine of (2) above,
The notification effect means indicates that the number of game media provided during the advantageous state has become a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, the total number of acquired game balls is 2500 as shown in step S1943 in FIG. 41). The notification effect according to the second notification mode (for example, the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 38) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by diversifying the notification effects.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
Advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that controls to the advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (for example, jackpot display result) )When,
In the advantageous state, a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can win, and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to win or cannot win. ) Variable means (for example, special variable winning ball apparatus 7),
Each time a game medium wins the variable means, the number of game media displayed can be variably displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the total number display image 205 in the A mode in FIG. 38, the B mode). Acquisition total number display image 215, step S1933 of FIG. 40, and the like.

  According to such a configuration, since the number of assigned game media can be variably displayed, the interest of the game in the advantageous state can be improved.

(5) The gaming machine according to any of (1) to (4) above,
In the advantageous state, effect state selection means (for example, FIG. 38) for selecting whether to set the first effect state (for example, A mode) or the second effect state (for example, B mode). Mode selection image 210, the process of step S1925 of FIG. 40, and the like.

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to select a production state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

(6) The gaming machine according to (4) or (5) above,
The advantageous state control means is configured to change the variable means (for example, until a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses) or at least one of winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game media is established. , A special variable winning ball apparatus, etc.) can be controlled to the advantageous state in which a unit game that can be changed to the first state (for example, an open state) is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, 15 times),
The notification effect means is given when a special number (for example, 11th or 12th) of game media is won in one unit game (for example, an overwinning occurs). The notification effect is executed after the number of game media to be added is added (for example, a process of adding a prize ball in an over win in the process of steps S1930 to S1932 in FIG. 40).

  According to such a configuration, since the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game media given in a single unit game, the number of game media awarded more than the specified number, it is appropriate for the player. It is possible to execute a notification effect.

(7) The gaming machine according to any of (4) to (6) above,
Notification mode determination means (for example, for effect control) that determines the notification effect mode to one of a plurality of types of notification modes (for example, notification with white characters, notification with rainbow characters, etc. shown in the modification). CPU 120, etc.)
A variable storage that has not yet been started, and further includes a storage unit for storing the display as a storage (for example, a storage buffer).
The notification mode determination means determines the notification mode based on the fact that a variable display that is the specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result or the like) is stored in the reserved storage during the advantageous state ( For example, as shown in the modified example, based on the fact that there is a reserved memory that is a jackpot display result in the reserved memory buffer during the big hit, the notification effect is changed to a rainbow character).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine the notification mode of the notification effect based on the fact that the variable display that is the specific display result is stored in the hold memory, and to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state Can do.

(8) The gaming machine according to (6) or (7) above,
The advantageous state control means includes, as the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state (for example, a normal big hit, which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state) Can be controlled to a big hit gaming state based on
Based on the fact that in one unit game in the first advantageous state, the game medium has won the special number (for example, the 11th or 12th) more than the specified number (for example, an over-winning has occurred). The notification effect in a special mode (for example, the notification effect in a mode in which the first grand prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in the second embodiment). Can be executed (for example, the processing of step S3923 and step S3924 in the CPU 120 for effect control shown in FIG. 43).

  According to such a configuration, by executing the notification effect in the special mode based on the fact that the game medium has won a special number larger than the specified number in one unit game in the first advantageous state, Interest can be improved.

(9) The gaming machine according to (6) or (7) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the second big prize opening) provided in the variable means in the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a probability change state). It further includes special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100).
After the game medium passes through the specific area in the advantageous state, the game medium has won the special number (for example, the eleventh and twelfth) more than the prescribed number in one unit game in the advantageous state. Based on (for example, the occurrence of over-winning), the notification effect in a special manner (for example, as shown in the second embodiment, the first grand prize opening LED 20c is rainbow-lighted and predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R). For example, the processing of steps S3923 and S3924 in the CPU 120 for effect control shown in FIG. 43).

  According to such a configuration, after the game medium passes through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is executed based on the fact that the game medium has won a special number larger than the prescribed number in one unit game in the advantageous state. By this, the interest of the game by notification production can be improved.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 43 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 44 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 24. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 27 formed in a frame shape that is provided on the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. The structure including the board 2). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area 24 to play a game.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 27, there is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 28. Under the hitting ball supply tray 28, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 19 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 28, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 10 for emitting hitting balls, and the like. The game board 2 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 27. The game board 2 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 2 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 24 is formed on the front surface of the game board 2 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 19 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). A stick controller 31 </ b> A that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 31A has a predetermined operation by, for example, performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 31C (see FIG. 45) that can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 35C (FIG. 45) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like with respect to the trigger button 31C is provided inside an operation rod of the stick controller 31A. Built-in). In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit (controller sensor unit) 35A (see FIG. 45) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 45) for causing the stick controller 31A to vibrate.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 28 may be operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). A possible push button 31B is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B (see FIG. 45) for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 43, the attachment positions of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and stick controller 31A as the position put to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example. As operation means, other operation means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

  Near the center of the game area 24, an image display device 5 is provided as first display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. On the right side of the image display device 5 in the game area 24, a first special symbol display device (first variation display unit) 4A that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, A second special symbol display device (second variation display unit) 4B that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of displaying numbers and characters in a variable manner. The image display device 5 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and an effect symbol display area is provided on the display screen for performing variable display of effect symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is done. In the effect symbol display area, a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols for left, middle, and right is formed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are collectively referred to as a special symbol display device (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 (game control board). The image display device 5 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display device 4B performs the second display. When the special symbol variation display is being performed, the effect display is performed on the image display device 5 along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, in the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variation display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is a normal winning ball device 6A or After passing through the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Is started, based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. . Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  When the jackpot display result (big jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the derivation display is performed, the image display device 5 also derives and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the image display device 5, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). In the state where it is in agreement with the combination of symbols), it is stopped, rocking, enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or multiple symbols are displayed synchronously in the same symbol, or the positions of the symbols are switched An effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit is continued before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the variation display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable display areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design, etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color, etc.) of the background image of the image display device 5 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning device having a normal winning ball device 6A is provided. The game ball that has won the normal winning ball device 6A is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first start port switch 22A.

  Further, below the winning device having the normal winning ball device 6A (first start port), an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second start port) is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the second start port switch 22B. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened by a solenoid 81. When the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the normal variable winning ball device 6B (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous to the player. In the state where the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the normal variable winning ball device 6B than the normal winning ball device 6A. In addition, in a state where the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in a state where the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the normal winning ball device 6A than the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It should be noted that, in a state where the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the closed state, it is difficult to win, but it may be possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). Hereinafter, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  Above the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a second hold indicator 25B comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the normally variable winning ball device 6B, that is, the second reserved memory number. Yes. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display in the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  Further, further above the second hold indicator 25B, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the normal winning ball device 6A, that is, the first holding memory number (the holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first hold indicator 25A composed of four indicators is provided. The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The gaming machine includes a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 10 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball to the gaming area 24. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 24 through a hit ball formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 24, and then descends the game area 24. When the game ball enters the normal winning ball device 6A and is detected by the first start port switch 22A, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, the first The first special symbol display device 4A starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol and the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the normal winning ball device 6A. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and is detected by the second start port switch 22B, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display device 4B starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the image display device 5 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The image display device 5 is used for decoration (for production) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation display of the effect symbol in the image display device 5 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B and the variation display of the effect symbol on the image display device 5 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the effect symbol that reminds the jackpot on the image display device 5 The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, at the lower position on the display screen of the image display device 5, a reserved storage display unit (total reserved storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (total reserved memory number). , A hold display area, not shown). In the combined hold storage display unit, the hold storage number can be specified as the hold storage display by, for example, the number of display of the predetermined image, by displaying the hold storage image (one hold storage image corresponding to each hold storage information, Is specified). In this way, by providing the summation pending storage display unit that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In each of the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the image display device 5, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the hold memory number are called hold display or hold memory display.

  As shown in FIG. 43, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 82 in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, and when it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, there is provided a normal symbol display 20 for variably displaying normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 20 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) that can display numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. That is, the normal symbol display 20 is configured so as to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the display change of the normal symbol display 20 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is closed disadvantageously for a player for a predetermined number of times. The state changes from the state to the open state advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general symbol holding display 25 </ b> C having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the passing gate 41. Each time there is a passing of a game ball to the passing gate 41, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the usual hold indicator 25C increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 20 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  In addition, an accessory 18 is provided above the image display device 5. The accessory 18 is located between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 and can be displaced by the movable effect member motor 61. The accessory 18 is usually located in a place where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and moves to a position (for example, a position in front of the image display device 5) that is visible to the player when a predetermined effect is executed.

  At the lower part of the game board 2, there is an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 8L and 8R that emit sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided at the left and right upper and lower left and outer sides outside the game area 24. On the outer periphery of the game area 24, a game effect lamp 9 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 44, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the variation time after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of releases in the big hit ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or When the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, the closed state is established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Here, in the big hit of this embodiment, the total number of game balls that can be acquired in one big hit is about 1500. Specifically, in one round, there are 10 payouts for 1 winning game ball, and the round continues until 10 wins, so about 100 per round (10 × 10 = 100) game balls can be obtained. Furthermore, since the round continues up to 15 rounds, a total of about 1500 game balls can be obtained. In addition, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, a game ball is accidentally set immediately before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is closed before a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses. There may be a special number (for example, 11th or 12th) that is greater than the number (for example, 10). Such a winning that exceeds a predetermined standard is also referred to as an over winning. When an over winning is generated, the player can acquire more balls.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability change state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state that is not the probability change state) as the special gaming state. The type (type) of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability jackpot”. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state may be controlled to a short time state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the production symbol is shortened from the non-short time state in association with the probability variation state. is there. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise. Note that the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15-round jackpot gaming state among the “hits” is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency of the game ball entering the normal variable winning ball device 6B is increased by increasing the frequency that the normal variable winning ball device 6B is opened in association with the probability changing state or the short time state. Then, there is a case where it is controlled to the electric chew support control state that makes it easy (higher approach, higher frequency) to win the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as will be described later, in the following description, it is mainly referred to as a high base state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), control to increase the opening time of the normal variable winning ball device 6B (opening time extension control), and the number of opening times of the normal variable winning ball device 6B Is controlled (opening frequency increase control). When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the winning to the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made. The frequency increases, and it becomes easy for the game ball to start and win (the execution condition of the variable display in the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the image display device 5 is easily established). By this control, the winning frequency to the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is increased, so that a gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state in which the winning frequency to the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is increased by the electric chew support control (high-frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the “base” is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Further, such control is control for facilitating winning to the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B by supporting the winning by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, that is, the electric tulip. be called.

  In this embodiment, as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, "high probability state (probability variation state)" and "low probability state (non-probability variation state)", as a term indicating the combination of the base state, The “high base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Further, in this embodiment, “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, and “high accuracy high base state” are used as terms indicating a combination of the big hit probability state and the base state. . The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 44, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, a normal big hit and a probability variable big hit, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state. Normally, in the big hit, the non-probable change state continues for the period until the next big hit occurs, the condition that the short-time state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times, such as 100 fluctuation displays, and the next big hit It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of, occurs. The normal big hit may be controlled so as to become a big hit controlled in a non-probability changing state, a non-time-short state, and a non-electricity chew support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the time-short state, and the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the jackpot gaming state. In the probabilistic big hit, such a high-precise base state is satisfied, whichever is earlier, a condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or a condition that the next big hit occurs. It continues for a period until. Note that the probability variation jackpot end condition may be a condition that the next jackpot occurs.

  FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board 11 (game control board) and the effect control board 12. FIG. 45 also shows the payout control board 37 and the like. The main board 11 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100 (corresponding to game control means) for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a program. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a ROM 101 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 102 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 103 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 105. The game control microcomputer 100 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 101 and a RAM 102 are built. The game control microcomputer 100 further incorporates a random number circuit 104 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 101. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 11.

  The random number circuit 104 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 104 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104.

  A switch circuit 110 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 100 is also mounted on the main board 11. In addition, a solenoid circuit 111 for driving a solenoid 81 for opening / closing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a solenoid 82 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forming a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 100 is also provided. It is mounted on the main board 11.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first hold display device 25A. The display control of the second hold indicator 25B and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C is performed.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control microcomputer (effect control CPU) 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a VDP 123, an I / O port unit 125, and the like. The ROM 121 stores a program and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 122 is used as a work memory. The ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be built in the production control microcomputer. The VDP 123 performs display control of the image display device 5 in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120.

  The effect control CPU 120 receives an effect control command for instructing the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 15 that allows a signal to pass only in one direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition to the variable display control of the image display device 5, the display control of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the frame side is performed via the lamp control board 14, and the speaker 8L, Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output from 8R.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action to the trigger button 31C of the stick controller 31A has been detected from the trigger sensor 35C to the input port of the I / O port unit 125. Enter through. Further, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 31B has been detected from the push sensor 35B via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. To do. Further, the production control CPU 120 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action to the operation stick of the stick controller 31A is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit (controller sensor unit) 35A. Input is performed via the input port of the port unit 125. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 125, thereby causing the stick controller 31A to vibrate. Further, the effect control CPU 120 drives the movable effect member motor 61 by operating the movable effect member motor 61 via a motor drive circuit (not shown).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 46, the type of random number, the update range, the usage, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR5): An initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining a random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types, that is, a normal big hit and a probable big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Determined by type. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  In addition, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). To determine the variation pattern. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be referred to as a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type without reach and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type with reach.

  When the display result is out of order, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is in the short-time state or not in the short-time state. When this is the case, the variation time is shortened compared to when the time is not short. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time compared to when the time-short state is not, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than when the time is not short, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected more frequently, and even when the reach type is selected, the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time is shorter than when not in the time-short state.

  In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that displays variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, When the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol for variable display is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it do. For example, in the hold number shortening control state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern type having a short variation display time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in a case where the hold number shortening control state is not set. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than that in the non-holding number shortening control state. In the hold number reduction control, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened even when the same change pattern type is selected as compared to the case where the hold number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of the two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 47 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 47 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number of jackpot judgment values) than the probability change jackpot judgment table (referred to as the jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change) is set. . As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is decided to make a big jackpot (normal jackpot or probable big hit) for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 47A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  47B and 47C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 47 (B) shows a case where a big hit type is determined using a holding memory (also referred to as a first holding memory) based on a game ball winning in the normal winning ball device 6A (the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used. FIG. 47 (C) shows a case where a big hit type is determined using a holding memory (also referred to as a second holding memory) based on a game ball having won the normal variable winning ball device 6B (the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). It is a 2nd special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed.

  Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables shown in FIGS. 47 (B) and 47 (C) is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1), the type of jackpot is determined to be either “normal jackpot” or “probable variation jackpot”, and is also referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 47 (B), there are numerical values to be compared with random 1 values, which are judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probability big hit” (big hit type judgment). Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 47 (C), there are numerical values to be compared with random 1 values, which are judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probability big hit” (big hit type judgment). Value) is set.

  47 (B) and 47 (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “normal jackpot” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “3” of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the random 1 value is matched as the jackpot type, and also determines the jackpot symbol with which the random 1 value is matched as the jackpot symbol. To do. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 47B and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 47C have the same ratio determined for probability variation jackpots. In such a case, the big hit type determination table may not be divided between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the big hit type is selected from among a plurality of types of big hits with different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as the big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. You may set so that the ratio by which the big hit type with many round numbers is selected becomes higher than the 1st special symbol big hit type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the big hit type selection is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 47 (C) may have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 47 (B). . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can be more likely to be a big hit than the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may be set to have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a variation pattern table used to select and determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular format.

  In FIG. 48, (a) shows a determination table for when the normal state is shifted, and (b) shows a determination table for when the short state is shifted. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 48A to 48D is stored in the ROM 101, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 48 includes a variation pattern type determination table that indicates the relationship between random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between random 3 and each variation pattern for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 48, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  In addition, “normal reach” in each table of FIG. 48 indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal reach that does not perform particularly flashy effects when the reach state is reached. “Super Reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is higher than that of “normal reach” is high, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (the big win becomes the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach). (Possibility) is high.

  The “expectation” is a concept including an expectation for jackpot, an expectation for probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) for the big hit is an expectation degree (a ratio to be a big hit) when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the number of hits is 60 times, the degree of expectation for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). In addition, the degree of expectation for probability variation refers to the degree of expectation (proportion of probability variation) that shifts to the probability variation state.

  Note that the variation pattern shown in the loss determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “out”. The variation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of “probability variation jackpot”.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the variation pattern “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that the variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds.

  In the table in which “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” are described in the table of FIG. 48, the function as a variation pattern type determination table section indicating the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is shown. It is a column to show. For example, taking FIG. 48 (a) as an example, there are a plurality of random 2 (1-251) values for each of a plurality of variation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. It is divided into numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 48 (a) as an example, if the random 2 value extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random numbers 1 to 251. Then, it is determined that the variation pattern type is “normal reach”.

  In the table of FIG. 48, the fields described as “Random 3 Range” and “Variation Pattern” indicate a function as a variation pattern determination table section indicating the relationship between “Random 3 Range” and “Variation Pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type of variation pattern type determination table are variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 48 (a) as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “first super reach”. “4 Super Reach”.

  All values of random 3 (1-220) are assigned to a plurality of numerical ranges in each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 48 (a) as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super-reach” is selected, random numbers 3 extracted at a predetermined timing are 1 to 220 random numbers. If it matches any numerical value of the determination values assigned to ˜70, it is determined that the variation pattern of “first super reach (50 seconds)” is set.

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is off, the determination table is selected as follows to determine the variation pattern. In the non-time-short state, when the fluctuation display result is out of place, the normal state out-of-state determination table of FIG. 48A is selected. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of time in the time reduction state, the time reduction state determination table in FIG. 48B is selected. Note that by using the determination tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the reach ratio at the time of deviation from the normal state and from the short time state is constant regardless of the number of holds.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether the time is short or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the fluctuation display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 48C is selected. When the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit regardless of whether the time is short or not, the probable big hit determination table of FIG. 48 (d) is selected.

  In the time short state deviation determination table of FIG. 48 (b), the fluctuation time of normal fluctuation is set shorter than that in the normal state deviation time determination table of FIG. 48 (a). 48 (b), the fluctuation time is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) compared to the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 48 (a). So that the percentage determined for normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations resulting in deviation display results instead of reaching reach)) is low, and the percentage determined for reach fluctuations with longer fluctuation times than normal fluctuations is low. Data is set.

  As a result, compared to the non-time-short state (normal state), the rate of change in the short-time state is higher in the time-short state, so the time-short state is the non-time-short state. The change display is performed with a change time shorter than that in the mean time. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. Further, by setting the normal fluctuation to be shorter in the time-short state than in the non-time-short state, the suspended digestion during the time-short state can be shortened.

  In the determination tables shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B that are selected when there is a deviation, the data is set so that the selection type of the reach type is selected in a height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been. On the other hand, in the determination tables shown in FIGS. 48C and 48D that are selected when the big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high / low relationship such that normal reach <super reach. Data is set. As a result, the ratio of super reach reach production (the ratio of super reach reach production when a reach is selected) is higher when a big hit is made than when it is out of reach. The performance can increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the determination table shown in FIG. 48 (d) that is selected when a promising big hit out of the big hits has a normal reach compared to the determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability is a big hit, the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach (the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than the case of the normal big win. By performing the reach of reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a promising big hit.

  Note that such a variation pattern is obtained when the total number of reserved storage (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that display variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different from when the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is longer than when the total number of pending storage is less than the predetermined number It is also possible to execute the hold number shortening control for shortening. However, the expectation for reach can be maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of stored holds is 3 or more). In addition, only the super reach in the reach may not be shortened so as to execute the hold time reduction control. Furthermore, the short time control of the number of holdings may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be executable by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be used.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In the game control microcomputer 100, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the game control state, as shown in FIG.

  49, main commands will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used as shown in FIG. 48, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the effect symbol variation display.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design determination designation command) for designating to end the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state start for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening open designation command that indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designation command after opening the big prize opening indicating the opening (closing) of the big prize opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating that the first starting win has been received. Command A 402 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating that there has been a second start winning.

  Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state). Command B001 (H) is a short time state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the short time state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a probability variation state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  Command C0XX (H) is a combined pending storage number designation command indicating the combined pending storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total pending storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the combined reserved memory number designation command is produced at the time of starting winning of a game ball to the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B (for example, when starting port switch passing processing described later is executed). It is sent to the control board 12. Further, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control board 12 at the time of starting the variable display (for example, when executing the special symbol variable display in-process described later). Note that the combined pending storage designation command and the pending storage count subtraction designation command may be used together. For example, a combined reserved memory number designation command may be used as a command that can specify the number of reserved memories after subtraction. It is to be noted that the command for specifying the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is transmitted instead of the total reserved memory number, and the effect control CPU 120 determines the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. The total value may be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are contents of winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B. This is an effect control command indicating. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the random value for variation pattern type determination among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to win a big win at the start winning, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type and the variation pattern type determination random number. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control for transmitting to the effect control board 12 is performed. A value for designating a range of a judgment value as a judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit at the time of starting winning based on the value set in the symbol designation command and the type of the big hit, and the variation type command Based on the above, the variation pattern type can be recognized.

  The command D0XX is a big winning opening prize notification command for notifying that a game ball has won a big winning opening. The big prize opening notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when a game ball passes through the big prize opening, for example.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data (holding storage data) such as random numbers corresponding to the holding storage on the game control microcomputer 100 side will be described. The reserved storage buffer is provided in the RAM 102.

  In the first reserved memory buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved memory number is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number. (Random 2) and random number for variation pattern determination (Random 3) are stored.

  Based on the winning to the normal winning ball device 6A or the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the CPU 103 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 104 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, A process of saving (storing) in the save area in the hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer based on winning in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Further, based on the winning in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  In some cases, “holding stored” indicates that the information related to the start winning as described above is stored in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer. Note that the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in advance. It may be extracted at the time of the start of symbol variation.

  As described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer is read out at the time of starting winning and used for the pre-reading notice effect, and is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

  When there is a start winning for the normal winning ball device 6A or the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first (second) start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command, etc. A command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the start winning reception command buffer provided in the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12, the received symbol designation command, variation type command, first (second) start prize designation command, total pending storage number designation command, etc. A storage area for storing data that can identify received commands is secured so that various commands can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variable patterns, and the variable symbol display operation and reach effect of the effect symbol And the like, or data indicating the control contents of various effects such as various effects without accompanying display of effects symbols. The notice effect control pattern includes data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initialization processing, game state restoration processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (random number circuit 104 is initially set), display random number update processing (variation pattern) (Variable random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), initial value random number update processing (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter initial value initial value update processing), and the like.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 103 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). Next, detection signals of the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 are input via the solenoid circuit 111, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). .

  Next, the CPU 103 displays the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol indicator 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the universal symbol hold indicator 25C. Display control processing for performing control is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, a drive signal is output to each display device in accordance with the contents of the output buffer set in step S32 and step S33. Execute control to

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for normal symbol determination and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). ). The CPU 103 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: step S24, step S25).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, a corresponding symbol is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the special winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process The value of the flag is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 20 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  In addition, CPU 103 performs a process of sending an effect control command to effect control CPU 120 (effect control command control process: step S28). Further, the CPU 103 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S30).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 103 is responsible for turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. Is output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, CPU 103 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, CPU 103 performs normal symbol display control processing for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of normal symbols in an output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). Further, the CPU 103 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 20 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (step S26). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, a start port switch passing process is executed (step S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, as described above, the RAM 102 stores on-hold storage data (first on-hold storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. A first reserved storage buffer and a second reserved storage buffer in which reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is stored. Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of each reserved storage is secured.

  In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 22A is turned on, the number of the first reserved memory data is stored on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). 1 is incremented by 1 and the numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from the random number circuit 104 or a counter for generating a software random number. (Random number for use) is extracted, and processing for storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 22B is ON, the second number of the second reserved memory data is counted on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). Increase the value of the pending storage number counter by 1 and extract numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) from the random number circuit 104 or a counter for generating a software random number Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “second” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed.

  The processing from step S300 to step S307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (step S300) is a process for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and for determining a big hit type in the case of the big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined (variation pattern type determination random number and variation pattern determination random number are used), and the variation time is measured according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for performing control such as the start of time measurement of a variable time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (step S302) is a process of performing control to transmit a display result designation command to the effect control CPU 120. The special symbol changing process (step S303) is a process that advances the process to the special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (step S304) is a variation display on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B when the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is timed by the variation time timer. Is a process for deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) is a process for performing control for opening the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 according to the type of the big hit. The special winning opening opening process (step S306) is a process of transmitting an effect control command for a round display effect in the big hit gaming state to the effect control CPU 120, and a process of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. It is a process to perform etc. If the conditions for closing the big prize opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305). When all the rounds are finished, the process shifts to a big hit end process (step S307). The big hit end process (step S307) is a process for performing control for causing the CPU 120 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  Next, the operation of the effect control CPU 120 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the effect control main process when the power is turned on. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step). S1701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S1702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, if the timer interruption flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (step S1703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify a received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 122) is performed (command analysis processing: step S1704). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (step S1705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as a change display of the effect symbol on the image display device 5 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in step S1704, among the processes corresponding to the control state, A process corresponding to the control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute effect control.

  Next, random numbers used by the effect control CPU 120 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol, etc.) A random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating is executed (step S1706). Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 is generated by counting of a random counter that updates a count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each. By being extracted at a predetermined timing, it is used as a random number.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving or deleting the hold display, etc.) is executed (step S1707).

  By performing such effect control main processing, the effect control CPU 120 transmits the image display device 5, various lamps, and speaker according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. By controlling the effect devices such as 8L and 8R, various effect controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  Here, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is provided. For example, the production control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, in the effect control counter setting unit, data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters is stored.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S1705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-read effect process (step S1500) for determining whether to perform the pre-read effect and selecting the type of the pre-read effect, and then setting the effect control process flag. Depending on the value, any one of steps S1800 to S1807 is performed.

  In the effect control process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the image display device 5 is controlled, and the change display of the effect symbol is realized, but the control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the effect is also executed in one effect control process.

  The pre-reading effect process (step S1500) is a process for performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when the pre-reading effect is executed. The pre-reading effect is a special symbol change based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold information before the order of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on the hold information (holding storage information) comes. This is a production technique such as determining the contents of the display and giving a notice in advance of how the future special symbols will change. For example, when the hold information is a jackpot, before the variable display by the hold information is executed, the jackpot may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information. An effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display based on the hold information as the target of the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target fluctuation display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S1800) is a process of performing a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the gaming control microcomputer 100. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  The effect symbol variation start process (step S1801) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) to be started. The effect symbol variation processing (step S1802) is processing for performing processing for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S1803) is a process of performing control to stop the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and derive and display the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The jackpot display process (step S1804) is a process of performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the image display device 5 of the occurrence of a jackpot after the end of the variation time. The in-round process (step S1805) is a process for performing display control during the round. If the final round is not completed when the round end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to post-round processing. The post-round processing (step S1806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. If the round start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to in-round processing. If the final round has ended, the process proceeds to jackpot end processing. The big hit end effect process (step S1807) is a process for performing display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended in the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 is a process stored in the ROM 121 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. In accordance with the process data set in the table, an effect device (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 is controlled.

  The process table includes process timer set values and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  Next, various effects performed in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the big hit display result, the big hit gaming state advantageous to the player is controlled. Then, during the round in the big hit game state, a notification effect related to the number of game balls given by winning a game ball is executed. Here, the notification effect related to the number of game balls includes an effect of notifying the number of acquired game balls to be paid out to the winning game balls. In addition, the notification effect related to the number of game balls includes an effect of notifying the occurrence of an over winning by changing the notification mode when an over winning is generated. Thus, the effect related to the number of game balls is an effect of performing some kind of notification for the acquired game balls (number of game balls).

  In addition, a plurality of types of notification effects related to the number of game balls are provided. For example, when the effect state is the first effect state, the notification effect is executed by the first notification mode, and when the effect state is the second effect state, the notification effect is executed by the second notification mode. In other words, the notification effect is executed depending on the effect state. The notification effect according to the first notification mode is executed based on the fact that the number of game media provided during the round (during the big hit gaming state) has reached a predetermined number. Further, the notification effect in the second notification mode is executed based on the fact that the number of game media given during the round (during the big hit gaming state) has become a specific number different from the predetermined number.

  During the round (during the big hit gaming state), each time a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the number of game balls given is displayed so as to be variably displayed. Further, it is possible to select whether the production state during the round (during the big hit gaming state) is the first production state or the second production state. In addition, the number of game balls acquired by winning over is also considered in the count of game balls for notification effects related to the number of game balls.

  A specific example of the notification effect will be described below. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining a notification effect. Here, in the present embodiment, the total number of game balls that can be acquired in one big hit is about 1500. Specifically, in one round, there are 10 payouts for 1 winning game ball, and the round continues until 10 wins, so about 100 per round (10 × 10 = 100) game balls can be obtained. When the big hit continues, the previous acquired total number display value is taken over. FIG. 54 shows a case where the second and subsequent jackpots are executed.

  FIG. 54A is a diagram showing a display screen of the image display device 5 in the first round during the big hit game when the big hit display result is obtained. In the first round, an effect that enables selection of the effect state during the round from two modes is executed. On the left side of the screen of the image display device 5, an A mode image 211 by a girl character is displayed. A B-mode image 212 by a boy character is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. The player selects one of the modes according to the mode selection image 210 indicated by the left and right arrows prompting the player to perform a selection operation. At the start of the round, the A mode image 211 is selected as the initial value, and the left side of the mode selection image 210 is selected. The fact that these images are selected can be known by blinking the images. The selected image may be surrounded by a thick frame instead of blinking, and any mode may be used as long as any mode is selected.

  The player can select any mode during one round. Such switching of the mode (effect state) can be changed by operating the stick controller 31A left and right. It should be noted that the left and right selections can be changed by operating means such as a cross key, or the mode may be switched by pressing the push button 31B. Further, three or more types of effect modes may be provided, or the types of effect modes that can be selected for each jackpot may be increased. Further, the mode selection period may be a round other than one round, and the selection operation may be performed only for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) during the round. In addition, a new production mode may be set as an initial value (type of mode selected first) for each jackpot.

  FIGS. 54B to 54D are explanatory views showing display screens of the image display device 5 when the A mode is selected. FIGS. 54E to 54G are explanatory diagrams showing display screens of the image display device 5 when the B mode is selected. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), when the A mode is selected, an acquired total number display image 205 of the number of game balls acquired by winning the big winning opening is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The acquired total number display image 205 increases every time a game ball wins a big winning opening. FIG. 54 (b) shows that the total number of acquired game balls in the jackpot is 2000. In addition, the first notification image 204 is displayed at the center of the screen every time the number of game balls acquired by winning in the big winning opening exceeds a multiple of 500. In FIG. 54 (b), when the number of game balls exceeds 2000, which is four times 500, the first notification image 204 indicates that 2000 game balls have been acquired. A girl image 203 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. Note that the number displayed in the acquired total number display image 205 and the number displayed as the first notification image 204 are the same display at an instantaneous timing. In addition, when the acquired total number is not a good number (for example, when it is increased by 13), the number displayed in the acquired total number display image 205 is different from the number displayed as the first notification image 204 ( The number displayed in the acquired total number display image 205 may be 2013, the number displayed as the first notification image 204 may be 2000), and the like.

  FIG. 54C shows a display screen of the image display device 5 when the total number of game balls acquired in the same big hit as FIG. 54B is 2500. As shown in FIG. 54 (c), the acquisition total number display image 205 indicates that the total number of game balls acquired is 2500. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, which is five times 500, the first notification image 204 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. Further, the girl image 203 is displayed as a person different from that shown in FIG. Further, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. FIG. 54 (d) shows that the total number display image 205 is 5000. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is 10 times 500, the first notification image 204 indicates that 5000 game balls have been acquired. In addition, the girl image 203 is displayed as a different person from that shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (c). Thus, when the number of game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the girl image 203 changes together with the first notification image 204. Here, the first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 are continuously displayed until the next notification image 204 and the girl image 203 are changed. However, the first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Next, a case where the B mode is selected in FIG. 54 (a) will be described. As shown in FIG. 54 (e), when the B mode is selected, an acquired total number display image 215 of the number of game balls acquired by winning a big winning opening is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The acquired total number display image 215 increases every time a game ball wins a big winning opening. Here, the acquired total number display image 215 in the B mode and the acquired total number display image 205 in the A mode have different character display modes. As described above, the display of the total number of acquisitions varies depending on the production mode, but the display of the total number of acquisitions may be the same regardless of the mode. FIG. 54 (e) shows that the total number of acquired game balls in the jackpot is 2000. A boy image 213 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. In the B mode, such an effect by the boy image 213 is executed. However, unlike the A mode, in the B mode, even if the total number of game balls acquired exceeds 2000, the effect of notifying the total number of game balls acquired in the center of the screen is not executed. In FIG. 54 (e), another effect image may be displayed without displaying the boy image 213.

  FIG. 54 (f) shows a display screen of the image display device 5 when the total number of game balls acquired in the same big hit as FIG. 54 (e) is 2500. As shown in FIG. 54 (f), the acquired total number display image 215 indicates that the total number of acquired game balls is 2500. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. In the B mode, the second notification image 214 is displayed at the center of the screen every time the number of game balls acquired by winning a winning opening exceeds a multiple of 2500. In FIG. 54 (f), when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, which is 1 times 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. The second notification image 214 is erased when a predetermined time elapses (for example, after 2 seconds from the display).

  Further, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. In FIG. 54 (g), it is shown that the acquired total number display image 215 is 5000 pieces. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is twice 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 5000 game balls have been acquired. Here, in the B mode, the boy image 213 displays an image of the same person without changing the character as in the A mode.

  As shown in FIG. 54, when the control is set to the A mode, the notification effect due to the acquisition of the game ball is executed by the first notification image 204. Further, when the mode is controlled to the B mode, the notification effect due to the acquisition of the game ball is executed by the second notification image 214. Therefore, the entertainment of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the notification effect according to whether the effect state is the A mode or the B mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 54B to 54D, every time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the first notification image 204 is used to generate a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. Further, as shown in FIGS. 54E to 54G, every time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, the second notification image 214 is used to generate a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. Therefore, by diversifying the notification effects, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  Further, as shown in the acquired total number display image 205 of the A mode and the acquired total number display image 215 of the B mode in FIG. A display in which the sphere increases by 10 is performed. Therefore, since the number of assigned game balls can be variably displayed, the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the change in the total number display.

  In addition, a mode selection image 210 for selecting whether the A mode or the B mode is selected during the round is displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to select the production state during the round, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing executed in step S1704 of FIG. In particular, FIG. 55 describes various flags that are set when a game ball is won at the big prize opening. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1511). If there is no received command (N in step S1511), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

  On the other hand, when there is a reception command (Y in step S1511), the effect control CPU 120 confirms, for example, the MODE data of the reception command to determine whether or not the reception command is a big prize winning notification command. Is determined (step S1512). When the effect control CPU 120 receives a winning prize winning notification command (Y in step S1512), the winning prize winning number is the stored value of the winning prize winning number counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit. The count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S1513). The grand prize winning number count value indicates the number of times that a game ball has won a big winning opening from the time a round is executed until the next round is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a big prize opening prize flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit (step S1514), and proceeds to the process of step S1515. The grand prize winning prize flag is a flag that is set every time a game ball wins a prize winning opening.

  In step S1515, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is an overwinning. For example, the updated winning prize count count value after the update is a predetermined over-winning determination value (a value larger than the winning upper-limit determination value. In this embodiment, the upper-limit winning determination value is “10”, so the over-winning determination is made) It may be determined whether or not the value is “11”). The effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process if it is not over-winning (N in step S1515). On the other hand, if it is over-winning (Y in step S1515), the effect control CPU 120 sets an over-winning flag (step S1516) and ends the command analysis process. The over-winning flag is a flag that is set every time a game ball wins a prize winning limit exceeding a winning upper limit determination value.

  In step S1512, when the received command is not a big prize winning notification command (N in step S1512), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting according to the received command (step S1517), and ends the command analysis processing. .

  56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the mid-round processing (step S1805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set (step S1920). Here, a flag such as a designated command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set by the effect control CPU 120 when the received command is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the RAM 122, and the big hit game ends. Is erased at a predetermined timing.

  The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S1921) when the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S1920). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) according to the contents of process data n (display control execution data n) (step S1922). ). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5, the image data is read from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is output to the VDP 123. At the same time, a control signal is output. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start time of the first round (step S1923). Whether or not it is the first round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. If the CPU 120 for effect control determines that it is the start time of the first round (Y in step S1923), the mode selection screen as shown in FIG. 54A is displayed (step S1924), and the process of step S1925 is performed. Transition to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the first round (N in step S1923), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of step S1928 without performing the processes of step S1924 to step S1926.

  In step S1925, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selected mode is the A mode. When the selected mode is the A mode (Y in step S1925), the effect control CPU 120 sets the A mode flag (step S1926), and proceeds to the process of step S1928. On the other hand, if the selected mode is not the A mode (N in step S1925), the effect control CPU 120 sets the B mode flag (step S1927), and proceeds to the process of step S1928. Here, when the player does not select the mode while displaying the mode selection screen, the A mode set as the initial value is selected.

  Next, in step S1928, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big prize opening prize flag is set. The grand prize winning flag is a flag set in step S1514 in FIG. 55, and is set every time a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 resets the big prize opening prize flag (step S1929) when the big prize opening prize flag is set (Y in step S1928), and proceeds to the process of step S1932. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the over-winning flag is set (step S1930) when the big winning opening winning flag is not set (N in step S1928). The over-winning flag is a flag that is set in step S1516 in FIG. 55, and is a flag that is set when an over-winning to the big prize opening has occurred.

  When the over-winning flag is set (Y in step S1930), the effect control CPU 120 resets the over-winning flag (step S1931), and proceeds to the process of step S1932. On the other hand, when the over-winning flag is not set (N in step S1930), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process in step S1940 without performing the processes in steps S1932 and S1933.

  In step S1932, the CPU 120 for effect control adds 1 to the value of the winning counter, updates the total number display (total number displayed) according to the mode (step S1933), and proceeds to the process of step S1940. In step S1933, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b) and FIG. 54 (e), the acquired total number display image 205 in the A mode and the acquired total number display image 215 in the B mode are used as game tickets. Each time you win, it will increase by 10. It should be noted that the processing for updating the display of the total number of acquisitions may be executed even when a game ball wins a winning opening other than the big winning opening during the round.

  In step S1940, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the A mode flag is set. When the A mode flag is set (Y in step S1940), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of step S1941. On the other hand, when the A mode flag is not set (that is, when the B mode flag is set) (N in step S1940), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of step S1943.

  In step S1941, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the total number of acquired game balls has exceeded a multiple of 500. When the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500 (Y in step S1941), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the number of acquired game balls by displaying the A mode (step S1942), and in step S1945. Transition to processing. For example, the display in the A mode indicates that the first notification image 204 or the girl image 203 is displayed when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, as shown in FIGS. Change). The display in the A mode is continuously displayed until the next display update. On the other hand, when the total number of acquired game balls does not exceed a multiple of 500 (N in step S1941), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of step S1945 without performing the process of step S1942.

  In step S1943, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500. When the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500 (Y in step S1943), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the number of acquired game balls by displaying the B mode (step S1944). Transition to processing. For example, the display in the B mode is a process of displaying the second notification image 214 when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, as shown in FIGS. Here, the display of the second notification image 214 in the B mode is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. For example, it is displayed when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, and is erased after 2 seconds. Note that the display of the second notification image 214 may be deleted at the timing when the round being executed ends. On the other hand, when the total number of game balls acquired does not exceed a multiple of 2500 (N in step S1943), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of step S1945 without performing the process of step S1944.

  In step S1945, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out (Y in step S1945), the effect control CPU 120 starts the next process timer (step S1946) and controls the effect device according to the content of the next process data ( In step S1947), the in-round processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out (N in step S1945), the effect control CPU 120 ends the in-round processing without performing the processing in steps S1946 and S1947.

  In step S1920, the effect control CPU 120 resets the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening if the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set (Y in step S1920) (step S1934). . Next, the CPU 120 for effect control selects an interval effect (effect that performs interval display according to the number of rounds), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S1935). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step S1936), sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S1806) (step S1937), and ends the in-round processing. .

  After the process of adding a prize ball for over winning is executed in the process of step S1930 to step S1932 of FIG. A variable display of the total number of acquisitions which is increased by 10 every time a prize is won in the big winning opening is performed. In this way, the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game balls awarded by winning 11 or 12 more than 10 game balls in one unit game. An appropriate notification effect can be executed.

  FIG. 56 shows a case where the total number of game balls acquired is determined after determining whether or not the A mode flag is set in step S1940. However, the total number of game balls acquired is determined first, and when the determination value exceeds a predetermined number, an image to be displayed is determined by checking whether the mode is the A mode or the B mode. You may do it.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings (FIGS. 58 to 62).
In the third embodiment, a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game by a notification effect that is executed when a specific number of game media are won more than a predetermined number will be described. For example, such a gaming machine is as follows.

  (1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easily won in a first state (for example, an open state) and a game medium is difficult to win. Variable winning means that can be changed to a second state (for example, a closed state) (for example, a special variable that executes a notification effect in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on a probability variation big hit. Variable winning means until at least one of a winning ball apparatus (large winning mouth)) and a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game media are won. Can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) in which a unit game (for example, a round) that can be changed to the first state is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). State control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100), and the advantageous state control means has at least a first advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a probable big hit) and the first advantageous state as an advantageous state. Can be controlled to a second advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit), and in one unit game in the first advantageous state, a specific number (eg, 11 Based on the winning (for example, over winning) (for example, the 12th and 12th), a notification effect in a special manner (for example, the first large winning opening LED 20c is rainbow-lighted and the speakers 8L and 8R receive a predetermined amount). Notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect in a mode of outputting a winning sound (for example, a probability variation big hit) In the game machine that is configured to be controlled to be in a probable state based on the fact that the notification effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 further includes a part that executes the same processing as steps S3923 and S3924). It is characterized by. According to such a configuration, by executing the notification effect in a special mode based on the fact that a certain number of game media has been won in a unit game in the first advantageous state in a number greater than a predetermined number, Interest can be improved.

  (2) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, wherein a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easily won in a first state (for example, an open state) and a game. Variable winning means (for example, a first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a (first big prize opening), a second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b (the medium is changeable to a second state where the medium is difficult to win (for example, a closed state)) The second big prize opening)) and a variable winning means until at least one of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game media is established. Advantageous state control means (for example, a game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) in which a unit game (for example, a round) that can be changed to one state is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). The control microcomputer 100) and a special state (for example, a probability change state) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific region (for example, a specific region in the second big prize opening) provided in the variable winning means in the advantageous state. ) Controllable special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100), and after the game medium passes through the specific area in the advantageous state, the number of game media specified in a unit game in the advantageous state is larger than a predetermined number. Based on the number (for example, the eleventh or twelfth) winning (for example, the occurrence of an over-winning), a notification effect in a special manner (for example, the first large winning opening LED 20c is lit in rainbow and the speaker 8L). , 8R notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect in a mode in which a predetermined winning sound is output. For example, it is characterized in that it includes a step S3923 and a step S3924 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, after the game medium has passed through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is executed based on the fact that the game medium has won a specific number greater than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state. By this, the interest of the game by notification production can be improved.

  (3) In (1), the notification effect executing means does not execute the notification effect in a special mode when the game medium has won a specific number in one unit game in the second advantageous state (for example, the probability variation big hit is obtained). In the game machine that is configured to be controlled to the probability variation state based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a normal big hit, it does not execute step S3923 and step S3924) It may be configured. According to such a configuration, in the second advantageous state, by not performing the notification effect in the special mode, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from decreasing.

  (4) In (2), when the game medium has won a specific number of game media in one unit game in the advantageous state before the game media passes through the specific area, the notification effect execution means performs the notification effect in a special mode. It may be configured not to execute (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute step S3923 and step S3924 when N in steps S3921 and S3922). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the entertainment interest of the game by the notification effect from being lowered by not performing the notification effect by the special mode before the game medium passes through the specific area. it can.

  (5) In (1) or (3), the notification effect executing means, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect (for example, the first large game) (A notification effect of a mode in which the winning opening LED 20c and the second large winning opening LED 20d emit white light) can be executed (for example, a portion in which step S3925 is executed when N in step S3920), and one unit game in the second advantageous state When a certain number of game media are won, a notification effect according to a normal mode is executed (for example, a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on a probability variation big hit. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is usually a big hit, it executes step S3925) It may have been made. According to such a configuration, in the second advantageous state, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode.

  (6) In (2) or (4), the notification effect executing means, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect (for example, the first large game) Before the game medium passes through the specific area, for example, a notification effect of a mode in which the winning opening LED 20c or the second large winning opening LED 20d emits white light can be executed (for example, when step S3920 is N, step S3925 is executed). In addition, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state, a notification effect according to a normal mode is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is N in step S3921 and step S3922, step S3925). May be configured). According to such a configuration, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode before the game medium passes through the specific area.

  (7) In any one of (1), (3), and (5), when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, a predetermined game value is given (for example, controlled to a probability change state) That a specific effect execution means (for example, a promotion effect executed in the same or similar manner as in FIGS. 61 (2) to (6)) can be executed In the game machine configured to be controlled to a probable state based on it, the effect control CPU 120 includes a part that executes the same processing as step S3928), and the notification effect execution means is specified. If a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the first advantageous state before the performance is executed, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed (for example, the probability variation is a big hit) In the game machine that is configured to be controlled in a probable state based on the above, the presentation control CPU 120 determines that it is the first to fifth rounds in which the promotion presentation is executed. Step S3923 and Step S3924 are not executed), and when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the first advantageous state after executing a specific effect, a notification effect in a special mode is executed (for example, probability change big hit and In the game machine configured to be controlled to be in a probabilistic state based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 is a round after the sixth round after the promotion effect is executed. If it is determined, step S3923 and step S3924 may be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the notification effect by executing the notification effect in a special mode after executing the specific effect.

  (8) In any one of (2), (4), and (6), a special area is selected based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the second big prize opening) in an advantageous state. Special effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step S3908 to step S3916 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect (for example, probability change confirmation notification) is provided, and the notification effect execution means plays a specific area in the advantageous state in the game. When a specific number of game media are won in a unit game (for example, the sixth round) through which the medium has passed, the notification effect in a special mode is not executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is in the sixth round). In step S3921, N is determined, and step S3923 and step S3924 are not executed. It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being disturbed by the notification effect in the special mode, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being deteriorated.

  (9) In any one of (1) to (8), the notification effect executing means emits light from the light emitter (for example, rainbow light emission of the first grand prize winning LED 20c) and sound output as the notification effect in a special mode. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps S3923 and S3925) including an effect including (for example, a predetermined winning sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R). According to such a configuration, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by the effect using the light emission and sound output by the light emitter.

  (10) In any one of (1) to (9), a predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, an obtained number notification effect, an accumulated prize ball number notification effect, a cumulative number acquired) A notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect, a continuous change number notification, a jackpot song name notification, a right strike notification, an error notification, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a jackpot promotion effect, and the like. As a first predetermined effect for notifying the magnitude of value acquired in a specific period (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during a big hit game), and in a special period A second predetermined effect for informing the magnitude of the acquired value (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during a big hit game in a continuous game) can be executed. The priority is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect (for example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize number notification effect is not executed, etc.). May be. According to such a configuration, a plurality of predetermined effects can be suitably executed.

  (11) In any one of (1) to (10), the notification effect executing means is configured to receive a first specified number (for example, eleventh) of winnings greater than a predetermined number and the first specified number of winnings. The notification effect is executed using a sound output channel that is different from the second specific number (for example, the twelfth) winning that is the next winning (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the eleventh (the first over winning) ), The first notification effect is executed on the reproduction channel Ch0, and the second notification effect is executed on the reproduction channel Ch1 in the twelfth (over-winning second). According to such a configuration, the notification effect can be executed on different channels for the first specific number of winnings greater than the predetermined number and the second specific number of winnings that is the next winning of the first specific number of winnings. A decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented. In addition, the notification effect can be executed even when more than a predetermined number of winnings occur at short intervals.

  The third embodiment will be described in more detail. Here, in the third embodiment, it is assumed that the first special variable winning ball device 20a is provided below the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and on the second special symbol display device 4B, a specific display result (big hit) In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 82a, so that the first big prize opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the first grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. In addition, a first special prize opening LED 20c is provided inside the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a. In this embodiment, the first big prize opening LED 20c is realized by a multi-color LED.

  In addition, it is assumed that a second special variable winning ball device 20b is provided below the first special variable winning ball device 20a. The second special variable winning ball device 20b includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and the specific display result (big hit) on the second special symbol display device 4B. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 82b, so that the second big prize opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the second grand prize opening is detected by the second count switch 23b. In this embodiment, a specific area is provided on the downstream side of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b in which the second count switch 23b is provided. It is detected by the specific detection switch 22. In this embodiment, the second count switch 23b is provided on the upstream side, and the specific detection switch 22 is provided on the downstream side thereof. Almost all of the game balls that have been made win a specific area and are detected by the specific detection switch 22. In this embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second count switch 23b, and the probability change state is controlled based on the detection by the specific detection switch 22. It is confirmed that In addition, a second special prize opening LED 20d is provided inside the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b. In this embodiment, the second grand prize opening LED 20d is realized by a multi-color LED.

  In this embodiment, the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. In a specific game state (a big hit game state) that sometimes occurs, the second big prize opening is controlled to be open in the sixth round, and the first big prize opening is controlled to be open in rounds other than the sixth round. In this embodiment, when a game ball wins a specific area in the second big winning opening in the sixth round during the big hit game, it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to the probable state after the big hit game ends.

  Also, in this embodiment, if a winning at the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening has occurred as a process during the round, the effect control CPU 120 will perform the first grand prize opening LED 20c or the second grand prize winning. The mouth LED 20d is controlled to emit white light. In this case, if it is a round other than the sixth round during the big hit game, the first big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, and thus the first big prize opening LED 20c is controlled to emit white light. In the sixth round, since the second big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, the second big prize opening LED 20d is controlled to emit white light. Whether or not it is the sixth round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command.

  42 to 44 are flowcharts showing round post-processing (step S1806) in the presentation control process according to the third embodiment. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step S3901). When the big hit end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step S3901), the effect control CPU 120 sets the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received. It is confirmed whether or not (step S3902). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S3902), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S3903), and the effect device (image display) is displayed according to the contents of the process data n. Control of the device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the LED 28, etc.) is executed (step S3904).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S3905). If the process timer has timed out (Y in step S3905), the process data is switched (step S3906). . That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step S3907), and the process proceeds to step S3908. On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (N in step S3905), effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process in step S3908 without performing the processes in steps S3906 and S3907.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (step S3908). If the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (that is, a probability change confirmation notification designation command indicating that it is determined that the state is controlled to the probability change state transmitted by passing through the specific area in the second big prize opening is received. If so (Y in step S3908), the effect control CPU 120 resets the certainty change confirmation notification flag (step S3909). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the probability change notification in the image display device 5 (step S3910). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a probability change confirmation notification execution flag, and sets a value corresponding to the execution period of the probability change confirmation notification (for example, a value corresponding to 1.0 seconds) in the effect period measurement timer T1. (Step S3911), the process proceeds to Step S3912. On the other hand, if the probability change confirmation notification flag is not set (N in step S3908), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process in step S3912 without performing the processes in steps S3909 to S3911.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the probability change confirmation notification executing flag is set (step S3912). If the probability change confirmation notification in progress flag is set (that is, if the probability change confirmation notification is being executed) (Y in step S3912), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer T1 ( In step S3913), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the effect period measurement timer T1 after subtraction has become 0 (step S3914). If the value of the effect period measurement timer T1 after the subtraction is 0 (Y in step S3914), the effect control CPU 120 ends the execution of the probability change confirmation notification in the image display device 5 (step S3915). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the probability variation confirmation notification execution flag, sets a probability variation confirmation notification flag indicating that the probability variation determination notification has been executed (step S3916), and proceeds to the processing of step S3917.

  In step S3912, if the probability change confirmation notification in-progress flag is not set (N in step S3912), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of step S3917 without performing the processes of steps S3913 to S3916. If the value of the effect period measurement timer T1 after subtraction is not 0 in step S3914 (N in step S3914), the process proceeds to step S3917 without performing the processes in steps S3915 and S3916.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big winning opening prize flag is set (step S3917). If the big prize winning flag is not set (N in step S3917), the effect control CPU 120 ends the post-round processing. On the other hand, if the grand prize winning flag has been set (that is, if a winning to the first grand prize winning mouth or the second big winning prize has occurred and a big winning prize winning designation command has been received) (step S3917). Y), the production control CPU 120 resets the big prize winning prize flag (step S3918). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S3919), and checks whether or not the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (step S3920).

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more, it is a case where an over winning to the big winning opening has occurred. The “over winning” is, for example, in this embodiment, the upper limit number (10 in this example) of the number of winning game balls to the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening for each round during the big hit game. However, the game ball is awarded to the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening exceeding the upper limit number. For example, in this embodiment, even before a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses in each round during the big hit game, the tenth to the first grand prize opening and the second big prize opening If a winning is detected, the first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening are controlled to be closed, but a game ball has won just before the first grand prize opening and the second big prize opening are closed. In some cases, an eleventh or twelfth prize may be awarded and an over-winning may occur.

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (that is, if over-winning has occurred) (Y in step S3920), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the seventh round or later. Is confirmed (step S3921). Whether the round is the seventh round or later can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command.

  If it is a round after the seventh round (Y in step S3921), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the probability variation confirmed notification flag is set (step S3922). If the probability change confirmation notification flag has been set (that is, if the probability change confirmation notification has already ended) (Y in step S3922), the effect control CPU 120 causes the first grand prize winning LED 20c to emit rainbow light (for example, , Red, blue, yellow, etc., are sequentially emitted) (step S3923). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a predetermined winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step S3924), and ends the post-round processing.

  In this embodiment, since the first big prize opening is only controlled to be in the open state in the seventh and subsequent rounds, there is only a case where the first big prize opening LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light in step S3923. Note that the second grand prize opening LED 20d may also be controlled to emit rainbow light.

  In this embodiment, the case where the processes of steps S3920 to S3924 are executed only in the post-round process is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a process mode. For example, the same processing as in steps S3920 to S3924 may be executed in the round processing. If configured in this way, for example, even if the program is configured to perform processing during the round until all the game balls won in the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening are detected, The first grand prize winning LED 20c can emit rainbow light or a predetermined winning sound can be output as a sound.

  When the value of the winning counter after the addition is not 11 or more (that is, not over-winning) (N in step S3920), or when it is not a round after the seventh round (that is, in the first to sixth rounds) If there is (if N in step S3921), if the probability change confirmed notification flag is not set (that is, if the certainty change confirmed notification has not yet ended) (N in step S3922), the CPU 120 for effect control is The first grand prize opening LED 20c or the second big prize opening LED 20d is controlled to emit white light (step S3925), and the post-round processing is ended. In this case, if it is a round other than the sixth round during the big hit game, the first big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, and thus the first big prize opening LED 20c is controlled to emit white light. In the sixth round, since the second big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, the second big prize opening LED 20d is controlled to emit white light. Whether or not it is the sixth round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball is won in the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening by executing the processing in the round or the processing after step S3917 to step S3925 of the round, at least A notification effect for causing the first grand prize opening LED 20c and the second big prize opening LED 20d to emit light is executed. In this embodiment, when the over-winning occurs, in particular, the processing of steps S3920 to S3924 is executed. In this embodiment, the game medium wins a specific area in the second big winning opening and the probability change confirmation notification is executed. After that, in the case of a round after the seventh round of the jackpot game, the first grand prize winning LED 20c is rainbow-lit and a notification effect is produced in a manner that a predetermined winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Executed. When over-winning occurs in such a manner, the notification effect is executed in a special mode different from the normal mode (in this example, the first large winning port LED 20c and the second large winning port LED 20d emit white light). It is possible to improve the interest of the game by the notification effect.

  However, in this embodiment, even if an over-winning occurs by executing the determination processing of step S3921 and step S3922, it is before the game ball wins a specific area in the second big winning opening. In such a case, the notification effect in a special mode is not executed. In this way, by preventing the notification effect in the special mode from being executed before the game ball is won in the specific area, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from decreasing. Further, in this embodiment, when N in Step S3921 and Step S3922, the process proceeds to Step S3925, so that even if an overwinning occurs, before the game ball wins a specific area in the second big winning opening. If so, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed. Thus, before the game ball wins a specific area, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed instead of the notification effect in the special mode, thereby improving the effect of the notification effect.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, by performing the determination process in step S3921, the second big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state, and a game ball may win in a specific area. In this case, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed (in this example, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed). With such a configuration, in this embodiment, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification may be executed, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed in the sixth round, so that the probability change confirmation notification is performed by the notification effect in the special mode. The execution is prevented from being hindered, and the production effect is prevented from decreasing.

  In this embodiment, by performing the determination process of step S3921 and step S3922, the game medium is won in a specific area in the second big prize opening and the probability change confirmation notification is executed, and then the seventh round of the big hit game In the subsequent rounds, the first grand prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, the processing mode is not limited thereto. . For example, when an over win occurs, it is determined whether the jackpot type is an advantageous jackpot that can be controlled to a probabilistic state or an unfavorable jackpot that is not substantially controlled to a probabilistic state, and is an advantageous jackpot If determined, the first grand prize winning LED 20c may be configured to emit rainbow light and to output a predetermined winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, it is determined whether or not the game medium has won the specific area in the second big winning opening shown in this embodiment and the probability change confirmation notification is executed, and whether or not it is the above-mentioned advantageous big hit. , The rainbow light emission of the first grand prize winning LED 20c and the sound output of a predetermined prize winning sound may be executed, or a game medium is placed in a specific area in the second grand prize winning mouth. The determination whether or not the winning change notification is executed and the determination whether or not it is an advantageous big hit is executed, and the rainbow light emission of the first big winning opening LED 20c and a predetermined amount are determined. Sound output of a winning sound may be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of large winning opening winning designation commands received by the effect control CPU 120 using the winning counter is counted, and it is determined that the prize is over winning based on the value of the winning counter being 11 or more. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 side may determine whether or not the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening is 11 or more to determine whether or not an over winning has occurred. Then, different grand prize winning prize designation commands are transmitted depending on whether or not they are over prizes, and the effect control CPU 120 side receives over winning prizes based on which major prize winning prize designation command is received. It may be configured to recognize whether or not.

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S3902), the effect control CPU 120 resets the big prize opening open flag (step S3926).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the next round to be started is the second to fifth rounds (step S3927). Whether or not it is the second round to the fifth round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. If the next round to be started is the second to fifth rounds (Y in step S3927), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the in-round effect including the promoted effect (step S3928), and the step The process proceeds to S3930. On the other hand, if it is not the second to fifth rounds (that is, if the next round to be started is a round after the sixth round) (N in step S3927), the production control CPU 120 produces an effect during a normal round ( A process table corresponding to the in-round effect not including the promotion effect is selected (step S3929), and the process proceeds to step S3930.

  In this embodiment, for example, a roulette effect is executed in the image display device 5 as a promotion effect. In this case, when starting the first round to the fourth round, in step S3928, a process table including an effect in such a manner that the ball rotates the roulette is selected as the promotion effect. Further, when starting the fifth round, in step S3928, the type of jackpot type is specified, and there is no possibility of winning in a specific area in the second big winning opening (it is determined that the control is performed in the probability variation state). In the case of a big hit (which is not expected), a process table is selected that includes an effect in such a manner that the roulette result is lost as the promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with a high probability of winning in a specific area in the second big prize opening (highly likely to be controlled in a probabilistic state), an effect in which the result of the roulette is a win is given as a promotion effect. Select the process table that contains it. Note that it is possible to determine which is the big hit type by, for example, checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step S3930), and produces the production device (production component as production component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the image display device 5, various lamps as effect parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step S3931). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer T1 (step S3932).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 initializes a winning counter (step S3933). That is, the value of the winning counter is set to zero.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S1805) (step S3934), and ends the post-round processing.

  When the big hit end designation command reception flag is set in step S3901 (Y in step S3901), the effect control CPU 120 resets the big hit end designation command reception flag (step S3935).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the ending effect (step S3936). Further, the effect control CPU 120 measures a value corresponding to the ending period at the end of the jackpot game (for example, a value corresponding to 3.0 seconds) for the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot game. The effect period measurement timer is set (step S3937).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step S3938), and produces the production device (production component as production component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the image display device 5, various lamps as production parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as production parts is executed (step S3939).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S1807) (step S3940), and ends the round post-process.

  Next, a specific example of the effect aspect of the notification effect will be described. FIG. 45 and FIG. 46 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the effect form of the notification effect according to the third embodiment. 45 and 46, the effect mode changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  As shown in FIG. 45 (1), the left, middle and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and a big hit occurs, and as shown in FIG. 45 (2), the first round is started and the big hit game starts. It shall be assumed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 (2) to (6), promotion effects are also executed in the first to fifth rounds (see step S3928). In the example shown in FIG. 45 (2), the case where the promotion effect is started by displaying the image 200 in such a manner that the sphere rotates on the roulette on the image display device 5 is shown.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 45 (3), when a winning in the big winning opening occurs during the big hit game round, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (3), a case where a game ball is won at the first grand prize opening and the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the first big prize opening LED 20c emits white light is shown.

  Further, even when the number of wins to the big prize opening reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 in this example) and the round is ended, an over win may occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 45 (4), even if an overwinning occurs, the game ball is won in a specific area in the second big winning opening before the sixth round, and the probability changes. If it is before the confirmation notification is executed, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (4), the case where the over-winning to the first big prize opening occurs and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits white light is shown (step S3925). reference).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 45 (5), the second and subsequent rounds are executed in the same manner, and when it becomes the fifth round as shown in FIG. 45 (6), the roulette success / failure result is notified. The promotion effect of a various aspect is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (6), based on the big hit type whose jackpot type is the probable big hit, the ball enters the area indicated as “probable” in the roulette, and the result of the roulette wins (probable change). A case is shown in which a promotion effect is executed by displaying a character string 201 such as “There is a probable change and promotion!” While displaying an image in such a manner as to result in suggesting that a state is to be achieved. Note that if the big hit type is a big hit that is not a probable big hit (usually big hit), for example, the ball enters the area other than the area marked “probable” in the roulette, and the roulette results are out of place (probable change). A promotion effect is executed in such a manner that an image in a mode that results in a suggestion of not being in a state) is displayed, and a character string such as “no probable change promotion!” Is displayed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where a roulette effect is performed is shown as a promotion effect, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, as a promotion, it is suggested that enemies and allies perform battles, suggesting that allies will win if they are victorious, or if allies are defeated, will not be A directing effect may be executed. Also, for example, as a promotion effect, an effect that displays an fortune is performed, suggesting that if the result of the fortune is `` good '', it will be in a probable state, and if the result of the fortune is `` bad '', an indefinite state An effect that suggests that it is not possible may be executed. As such, any promotion effect can be used as long as it is possible to ask whether or not it is controlled in a certain variation state in some manner.

  Further, in this embodiment, the promotion effect is executed from the first round to the fifth round, and the result of the promotion effect is notified in the final fifth round (in this example, the result of the roulette is notified). However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, you may comprise so that the result alert | report of a promotion effect is possible also in the 1st round-the 4th round, without waiting for the 5th round. In this case, if it is after the notification of the result of the promotion effect, the notification effect in the special mode may be executed when the over-winning occurs without waiting for the fifth round or the sixth round.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 45 (7), the process proceeds to the sixth round, and the second big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (7), in the sixth round, the game ball wins the second big prize opening and the game ball wins a specific area in the second big prize opening, and is controlled to be in a probable state. Is determined. The example shown in FIG. 45 (7) also shows that the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the second big prize opening LED 20d emits white light because the game ball won the second big prize opening during the sixth round. Has been. Further, on the basis of the fact that it is determined that the control is in the probability variation state, the execution of the probability variation confirmation notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (8), a case where a character string 202 such as “probability confirmed!” Is displayed on the image display device 5 as the probability change confirmation notification.

  In FIG. 45 (7), when a game ball wins a specific area in the second big prize opening (especially when the first game ball wins in the specific area), the second big prize opening LED 20d. The first grand prize winning LED 20c may emit light with a dedicated light emission color (for example, light emission in red that is different from the special effect notification effect) or a special winning sound (for example, different from the special effect notification effect). A special winning sound) may be output.

  In addition, even when the number of wins in the second grand prize opening reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 in this example) in the sixth round and the round is ended, an over win may occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (9), even if an overwinning has occurred, if it is the sixth round in which probability change confirmation notification may be executed, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. Is done. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (9), the case where an over-winning to the second big prize opening occurs and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the second big prize opening LED 20d emits white light is shown (step S3925). reference).

  Next, the process proceeds to rounds after the seventh round. Even in the rounds after the seventh round, as shown in FIG. 46 (10), when a winning at the big winning opening occurs during the big hit game round, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (10), a case where a game ball is won at the first grand prize opening and the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the first big prize opening LED 20c emits white light is shown.

  On the other hand, when an over winning is generated in the seventh and subsequent rounds, as shown in FIG. 46 (11), the notification effect is executed in a special mode different from the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (11), an over winning is made to the first grand prize opening, the first big prize opening LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light, and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The case where the notification effect is executed is shown (see Step S3923 and Step S3924).

  In this embodiment, the case where a predetermined winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only in the case of the notification effect in the special mode is shown. However, the notification effect in the normal mode is not limited to such a mode. Even when it is executed, some winning sound (same or different sound as in the case of the special mode) may be output.

  In this embodiment, as a notification effect in a special mode, the first grand prize opening LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light, and the effect of a mode in which a predetermined winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R is shown. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the first grand prize opening LED 20c may simply emit rainbow light and may not be accompanied by a sound output of a winning sound. Further, for example, if the light emitting color is different from the notification effect according to the normal mode, the first grand prize winning LED 20c is caused to emit light with a light emitting color (for example, red or yellow) other than the rainbow light emission. Also good. Further, for example, instead of causing the first grand prize winning LED 20c to emit rainbow light, an effect of outputting a sound imitating a voice of a predetermined character may be executed as a notification effect in a special mode. As such, various types of effects can be considered as notification effects in a special aspect.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, a predetermined period (29 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number of game media (game balls in this example) (10 in this example). It is possible to change the variable winning means (in this example, the first grand prize opening, the second big prize opening) to the first state (in this example, the open state) until at least one of winning is established. Can be controlled in an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) in which a predetermined unit game (in this example, round) is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds), and provided in the variable winning means in the advantageous state Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, the specific area in the second big prize opening), it can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the probability variation state). In addition, after the game medium passes through the specific area in the advantageous state, the game medium has won a specific number (for example, 11th and 12th) more than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state (in this example, , Based on the occurrence of an over-winning), a notification effect in a special mode (in this example, the first large-award winning port LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R. ) Can be executed. Therefore, after the game medium has passed through the specific area, a notification effect in a special mode different from the normal mode is executed based on the fact that a specific number of game media has been won in a unit game in an advantageous state that is greater than a predetermined number. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the notification effect.

  In this embodiment, the case where the predetermined number of times that the unit game (round) is executed in the jackpot game is 15 times (15 rounds) is shown. However, the number of times is not limited to such a mode. May be. The predetermined number of times may be once or twice. For example, when there is a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit that opens the big prize opening only once or twice, the sudden probability change big hit or You may comprise so that the overwinning in a small hit can also be detected.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the advantageous state before the game media pass through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed. Therefore, by preventing the notification effect in the special mode from being executed before the game medium passes through the specific area, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from decreasing.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that less than a certain number of game media have been won in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect according to the normal mode (in this example, the first big prize opening LED 20c and the second big prize The notification effect in a mode in which the winning opening LED 20d emits white light can be executed. In addition, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state before the game media pass through the specific area, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed. Therefore, before the game medium passes through the specific area, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect of the normal mode instead of the notification effect of the special mode.

  In this embodiment, when an over winning occurs before a game ball wins a specific area in the second grand prize opening, a notification effect in a normal mode is executed instead of a notification effect in a special mode. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when an over-winning occurs before a game ball wins a specific area in the second big winning opening, a notification effect may not be executed at all.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (in this example, probability change confirmation notification) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the advantageous state. Then, when a specific number of game media are won in a unit game (in this example, the sixth round) in which the game media have passed through a specific area in the advantageous state, a notification effect in a special mode is not executed (in this example, special The notification effect according to the normal mode is executed instead of the notification effect according to the mode). For this reason, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being disturbed by the notification effect in the special mode, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification is executed, only the notification effect in the special mode is not executed, and the notification effect in the normal mode (in this example, the first grand prize opening LED 20c and the second Although the notification effect of the mode in which the special winning opening LED 20d emits white light is shown to be executed, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification is executed, both the notification effect in the special mode and the notification effect in the normal mode may not be executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as a notification effect in a special mode, light emission by a light emitter (in this example, rainbow light emission of the first grand prize opening LED 20c) and sound output (in this example, predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R) The production including the sound output of the winning sound) is executed. Therefore, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by the effect using the light emission and sound output by the light emitter.

[Modification]
In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where it comprises so that it may be controlled to a probable change state based on having won the game ball to the specific area | region provided in the 2nd big winning opening is shown, I can't catch it. For example, as a big hit type, a normal big hit (a big hit that is not controlled to a promiscuous state after a big hit game. It may be controlled to a short time state or a high base state after a big hit game) and a promiscuous big hit (a positive change after a big hit game). (It is also possible to control the short-time state or the high base state together with the probability variation state.) So that the probability variation state is controlled based on the fact that the probability variation big hit is achieved. In the gaming machine configured as described above, a configuration for executing the notification effect shown in this embodiment may be applied. Hereinafter, a modified example in which a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit will be described.

  In this modification, the specific area need not be provided in the special winning opening, and only one special variable winning ball apparatus (large winning opening) may be provided.

  When a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, at least a first advantageous state (in this example) as an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) In, in this example, it is possible to control a big hit gaming state based on a probable big hit and a second advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit (non-probable big hit)) which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state. . Based on the fact that one of the unit games in the first advantageous state among them wins a specific number (for example, the eleventh and twelfth) more than a predetermined number (in this example, ten), A notification effect according to a special mode (in this example, a notification effect in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R) may be executed. According to such a configuration, the notification is performed by executing a notification effect in a special mode different from the normal mode based on the fact that a predetermined number of game media are won in a unit game in the first advantageous state, which is greater than a predetermined number. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by directing.

  Further, when a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, a big hit based on the second advantageous state (in this example, a normal big hit (non-probability big hit)) When a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the (gaming state), the notification effect in the special mode may not be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination process of step S3921 and step S3922 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether or not it is a normal big hit, and if it is determined that it is a normal big hit, the processes of step S3923 and step S3924 are not executed. What should I do? If comprised in that way, it can prevent that the entertainment interest of the game by alerting | reporting effect declines by not performing the alerting | reporting effect by a special aspect in a 2nd advantageous state.

  Further, when the notification effect is executed in the gaming machine configured to be controlled to the probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media have been won in one unit game in the advantageous state. Thus, a notification effect according to a normal mode (in this example, a notification effect in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c and the second big prize opening LED 20d emit white light) can be executed. Then, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the second advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state based on the normal big hit), the notification effect in the normal mode may be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination processing in steps S3921 and S3922 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether or not it is a normal big hit, and if it is determined that it is a normal big hit, the processing in step S3925 is executed. That's fine. If comprised in that way, in the 2nd advantageous state, it replaces with the alerting effect by a special aspect, and the alerting effect by a normal aspect can be performed, and the effect effect of an alerting effect can be improved.

  In addition, when a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, a predetermined game value is given when controlled to an advantageous state. (In this example, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, a promotion effect executed in the same or similar manner as in FIGS. 45 (2) to (6)) to notify that it is controlled to be in a certain variation state. . Then, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the first advantageous state before the specific effect is executed (in this example, before the result notification in the promotion effect), the notification effect in a special mode is executed. (In this example, instead of the notification effect in the special mode, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed), and after the specific effect is executed (in this example, after the result notification in the promotion effect), the first advantageous state When a specific number of game media are won in one unit game, a notification effect in a special mode may be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination process in step S3921 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether or not the first round to the fifth round in which the promotion effect is executed, and the first round in which the promotion effect is executed. If it is determined that it is the fifth round, step S3923 and step S3924 may not be executed (step S3925 may be executed). If it is determined that the round is the sixth round or later, steps S3923 and S3924 may be executed. If comprised in that way, the effect effect of an alerting | reporting effect can be improved by performing the alerting effect by a special aspect after performing a specific effect.

  In the above embodiment, since it is determined that the game ball is actually controlled based on the fact that the game ball has won the specific area in the second grand prize opening, in the first to fifth rounds. Even if the promotion effect is executed and the winning result is notified, it is suggested that there is a high probability that it will be controlled to the probability variation state, but in this modification, whether or not the probability variation state is controlled by the big hit type. Since it is determined, if the winning result is notified in the promotion effect, it can be recognized that the state is controlled as it is.

  In the above-described modification, the first advantageous state with a high degree of advantage is a big hit gaming state based on a probable big hit, and the second advantageous state with a low degree of advantage is a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit (non-probable big hit). Although a case has been shown, it is not limited to such a mode.

  For example, when a short-time big hit that is controlled only in the short-time state after a big hit game and a normal big hit that is controlled only in the normal state are provided, the first advantageous state is set to the big-hit gaming state based on the short-time big hit, and the second advantageous The state may be a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit. Further, for example, when the so-called look-ahead determination is performed during the big hit game, when there is a big hit in the hold memory (that is, when the big hit is a continuous big hit), the first advantageous state is set. The case where there is nothing may be the second advantageous state.

  For example, the first advantageous state may be a big hit with a large number of rounds (for example, a big hit of 15 rounds), and the second advantageous state may be a big hit with a small number of rounds (for example, a big hit of five rounds). In addition, for example, the first advantageous state is a big hit (the big hit in which the probable change state or the short-time state continues until the next big hit) in which the number of times of the probability change after the big hit game and the number of short-time continuations are not determined, and the second advantageous state is the big hit game It is good also as a big hit in which the number of subsequent probability change continuations and the number of short-time continuations are defined. Further, for example, the first advantageous state may be a big hit with a large number of probability change continuations and short-time continuation times after a big hit game, and the second advantageous state may be a big hit with a small number of probability change continuations and a short-time continuation number after a big hit game.

  As long as the first advantageous state having a high advantage and the second advantageous state having a low advantage are provided in some form as described above.

  Even in one case, there are cases where advantages or disadvantages can be distinguished from a plurality of viewpoints. For example, when there are 5R probability variation big hits and 10R normal big hits as big hit types, the 10R normal big hit with a large number of rounds is more advantageous from the viewpoint of the number of rounds, and it can be considered from the viewpoint of the gaming state after the big hit game. For example, the 5R probability variable big hit which is controlled to the probability changed state after the big hit game is more advantageous. In this case, priority may be given to the 10R normal big hit as the first advantageous state in view of the number of rounds, and the second advantageous state may be set as the second advantageous state for the 5R probability variable big hit. The probability variation big hit may be the first advantageous state, and the 10R normal big hit may be the second advantageous state.

  In the above embodiment, as a notification effect, a first notification that notifies the magnitude of the value acquired in a specific period (a prize ball number notification effect that notifies the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit game) ) And a second notification that informs the magnitude of the value acquired during the special period (awarded ball number notification effect that notifies the number of award balls that were paid out as a winning ball during a big hit game in a continuous game) It is good. The priority level of the first notification may be higher than that of the second notification (when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed). In this way, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed. That is, a plurality of notification effects can be executed according to the priority order so as not to overlap, and a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in one open game (in this example, a big hit game), the number of game media (in this example, game balls) is more variable than the upper limit winning number (in this example, 10). Based on the winning means (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening)), it is possible to execute a notification effect (notification effect for over winning). Also, different sound output channels are used for the first winning number (11th) and the second winning number (12th), which is the next winning after the first winning number, which is larger than the upper limit winning number. The first notification effect is executed on the reproduction channel Ch0 in the eleventh (over winning first) and the second on the reproduction channel Ch1 in the twelfth (second over winning). The notification effect may be executed). In this way, the notification effect can be executed on different channels for the first winning number that is larger than the upper limit winning number and the second winning number that is the next winning of the first winning number. The fall of the interest of the person can be prevented. In addition, the notification effect can be executed even when a winning greater than the upper limit winning number occurs at a short interval.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 38, when the mode is controlled to A mode, the first notification image 204 provides a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. Further, when the mode is controlled to the B mode, the notification effect due to the acquisition of the game ball is executed by the second notification image 214. Therefore, the entertainment of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the notification effect according to whether the effect state is the A mode or the B mode.

  (2) As shown in steps S1941 to S1942 of FIGS. 38 (b) to (d) and FIG. 41, each time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the first notification image 204 in the A mode is used to play the game. A notification effect is obtained by acquiring the ball. Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 (e) to (g) and steps S1943 to S1944 in FIG. 41, each time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, the second notification image 214 in the B mode gives a game ball. A notification effect is obtained by having acquired. Therefore, by diversifying the notification effects, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  (3) As shown in the acquired total number display image 205 of the A mode and the acquired total number display image 215 of the B mode in FIG. 38, each time a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, A display in which game balls are incremented by 10 is performed. Therefore, since the number of assigned game balls can be variably displayed, the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the change in the total number display.

  (4) As shown in step S1923 to step S1927 of FIG. 38A and FIG. 40, a mode selection image 210 for selecting whether to set the A mode or the B mode during the round is displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to select the production state during the round, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  (5) After the process of adding the winning ball in the over winning is executed in the processes of steps S1930 to S1932 of FIG. A variable display of the total number of acquisitions which is incremented by 10 every time a game ball wins a big winning opening is performed. In this way, the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game balls awarded by winning 11 or 12 more than 10 game balls in one unit game. An appropriate notification effect can be executed.

(Fourth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  In the fourth embodiment, part or all of the contents already described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment will be described again (the first embodiment and the second embodiment). Mode, the same or different expressions as in the third embodiment), and some or all of the contents already described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment. The description may be omitted, or some or all of the contents omitted in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment may be described.

  In the fourth embodiment, an example in which the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment are combined will be described.

In the first embodiment, a first effect control board 12 and a second effect control board 30 (such as VDP of the display control unit 31) that can communicate with the first effect control board 12 are provided. However, when a period during which predetermined communication with the second effect control board 30 cannot be performed (for example, a period when the rising signal cannot be received) exceeds a specific period (for example, 10 seconds), the second effect control board 30 In the above description, the specific signal (for example, reset signal) is continuously supplied over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).
In the fourth embodiment, the effect state (for example, the A mode and B mode shown in FIG. 38, etc.) in the advantageous state in the second embodiment and the third embodiment is controlled, for example, the effect control CPU 120. And the VDP 123 when a predetermined period of communication (for example, a period in which a rising signal cannot be received) exceeds a specific period (for example, 10 seconds), a specific signal (for example, a reset signal) to the VDP 123 Is continuously supplied over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and when the specific signal is supplied, the effect by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, one or both of the first notification effect and the second notification effect) May not be executed.
By doing in this way, the effect similar to 1st Embodiment can be acquired.

The gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
First control means (for example, the first effect control board 12, the effect control board 12, etc.);
Second control means capable of communicating with the first control means (for example, the display control unit 31 of the second effect control board 30 and the VDP 123 of the effect control board 12);
An effect state control means (for example, an effect state control means (for example, an effect state during a round) in the advantageous state can be controlled to any one of a plurality of effect states (for example, an A mode or a B mode in FIG. 54). , CPU 120 for production control)
A notification effect (for example, a notification effect by the first notification image 204 or the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 54) related to the number of game media (for example, the number of game balls) given during the advantageous state is executed. Notification production means (eg, CPU 120 for production control);
With
The notification production means is
When the production state control means controls the first production state (for example, A mode), the notification production according to the first notification mode (for example, the first notification image 204 shown in FIG. 54) is executed.
When the production state control means is controlling the second production state (for example, B mode) different from the first production state, a second notification mode (for example, FIG. 54) different from the first notification mode. The notification effect by the second notification image 214 or the like shown),
The first control means includes
When a period during which predetermined communication with the second control means cannot be performed (for example, a period during which a rising signal cannot be received) exceeds a specific period (for example, 10 seconds), a specific signal ( For example, a reset signal or the like is continuously supplied over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can be suitably controlled. In addition, by supplying the specific signal continuously for a predetermined period, it is possible to suppress an effect operation that imposes a burden on the second effect control means.

  In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and the player operates the operation lever. Slots in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when multiple types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player It is also possible to apply to a machine.

For example, when the configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications are applied to a slot machine, the gaming machine has an advantageous state advantageous to the player (BIC bonus, regular bonus, ART, AT, RT, high accuracy state) , Chance zones, etc.) that can be controlled (for example, slot machines)
A first control means (for example, an effect control CPU), a second control means (for example, a display control unit (VDP, etc.), etc.) capable of communicating with the first control means, and a plurality of types of effect states in the advantageous state. Notification that performs a notification effect related to the number of game media (for example, the number of medals, etc.) provided during the advantageous state, and a state control means (for example, a control CPU) that can be controlled to any one of the performance states Production means (for example, production control CPU, etc.),
The notification effect means, when being controlled to the first effect state (for example, the effect during the big bonus) by the effect state control means, the notification effect according to the first notification mode (for example, the effect based on the notification image corresponding to the big bonus) Etc.) and the second notification mode (for example, different from the first notification mode) (for example, regular bonus etc.) is controlled by the display state control means. The first control unit executes a notification effect by a notification image corresponding to the regular bonus, etc., and a period during which the first control unit cannot perform predetermined communication with the second control unit (for example, a period during which the rising signal cannot be received) is a specific period ( For example, when it exceeds 10 seconds, a specific signal (for example, a reset signal) is given to the second control means for a predetermined period. For example, it may be supplied continuously over, etc.) 60 seconds.

  According to this configuration, the gaming machine can be suitably controlled. In addition, by supplying the specific signal continuously for a predetermined period, it is possible to suppress an effect operation that imposes a burden on the second effect control means.

Next, each embodiment described above, each modification, feature points, and the like are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the notification mode of the notification effect may be varied depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the notification effect mode is set to a plurality of types of notification modes, and the notification effect with white characters and the notification effect with rainbow characters are executed. Then, during the big hit game, based on the fact that there is a reserved memory that is a jackpot display result in the reserved memory buffer, a notification effect that is normally executed with white characters may be executed with rainbow colored characters. In this way, it is possible to determine the notification mode of the notification effect based on the fact that the variable display that is the jackpot display result is stored in the holding storage buffer, and to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot game it can. In addition, when the variable display which becomes a jackpot display result is memorize | stored in the holding | maintenance memory | storage buffer, you may be made to perform alerting | reporting effect in the ratio of 100%, and a predetermined lottery ratio (for example, The notification effect may be executed with rainbow characters at a ratio of 50%. Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the notification effect may be executed a plurality of times in one big hit, and each time a lottery for determining whether or not to make a rainbow character may be executed. . Moreover, if the notification effect by the rainbow character is executed at a time, the subsequent notification effect may be executed by the rainbow character.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, during the big hit game, the promotion effect from the normal big hit to the probable big hit may be executed. In such a case, when the notification effect is executed in the round in which the promotion effect is executed, the notification effect may be different from the normal mode.

  (3) In the embodiment described above, a plurality of types of jackpots may be provided. And you may make it the aspect of an alerting | reporting effect differ with kinds of jackpots. For example, 4R big hits, 8R big hits, and 15 round big hits may be provided as types of big hits, and the notification mode of the notification effect may be different depending on the type of each big hit.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, an upper limit value may be provided for the display of the total number display. And when a game ball is acquired to the said upper limit, you may make it stop the update of acquisition total number display. For example, when 100,000 is set as the upper limit and the total number of acquired game balls exceeds 100,000, the total number display image 205 in the A mode and the total number display image 215 in the B mode are displayed. The update of the display image may be stopped. In this way, it can be notified by stopping the update that the player has acquired a large amount of game balls, and a sense of superiority can be given to the player. When the upper limit value is reached, the acquired total number display may be changed to a mode different from the normal display mode.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, it may be changed according to the total number of game balls that have acquired the notification effect mode. For example, in the case where the B mode is selected, when the total number of acquired game balls is 2500, the second notification image 214 is displayed as a white character image, and the total number of acquired game balls is 5000. The second notification image 214 may be displayed as a red character image, and when the total number of acquired game balls reaches 10,000, the second notification image 214 may be displayed as a rainbow character image. In this way, the notification mode changes according to the total number of acquisitions, and the interest of the game during the big hit game can be improved. In the A mode, the notification mode may be different depending on the total number of acquired game balls. In such a case, the notification mode may be different only when the number is a good number such as 2500, 5000, or 10,000, or the notification mode may be different every 500 pieces. .

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the notification effect may be different when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value. For example, when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value, the notification effect may not be executed, or a different concept may be displayed. More specifically, the notification image may not be displayed after the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value. In addition, after the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value, a congratulations display such as “Congratulations!” Is displayed as a concept (such as a display that celebrates the achievement of the predetermined value). A notification effect by a display that changes to characters may be executed.

  (7) In embodiment mentioned above, the case where a display image differs as an aspect of alerting | reporting effect according to the effect state (by A mode or B mode) was shown. Such display images may have different character colors, different character fonts, or different character appearances. For example, the appearance of characters may be different depending on whether the appearance direction of characters (numbers) comes out from the left of the display screen of the image display device 5 or comes out from the right.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the image when the notification effect is executed may be composed of different materials. For example, when the A mode is selected, the first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 may be composed of different materials. In this way, images to be displayed can be set separately. As a display method, for example, a combination of images may be determined by lottery. In such a case, a restriction may be applied so that the same predetermined image is not continuously displayed.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, during the selection of the mode as shown in FIG. 54A, the notification effect may not be executed even if the total number of game balls acquired exceeds a predetermined value. In such a case, the fact that the notification effect is executed is stored in the storage area of the RAM 122 so that it is notified that the total number of acquired game balls has exceeded a predetermined value after the mode selection is completed. Also good. Further, when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value during the mode selection, the notification effect may not be executed.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the A mode and the B mode can be selected in the first round is shown. However, during the big hit game, the A mode and the B mode may always be selected. In that case, in the second and subsequent rounds, the selection display can be selected as the end area of the display screen so that it does not interfere with the effect during the round by occupying a large area of the display screen of the image display device 5. A certain thing may be displayed small.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the A mode and the B mode can be selected in the first round is shown. However, the player may not be able to select a mode when the special condition is satisfied. For example, in a case where some story is continuously displayed during each round of big hits, the special condition is established that the ending of the story is displayed based on the fact that the big hits are repeated 20 times. In this case, the mode may not be selected during the 20th big hit when the ending is displayed. Also, during the 20th big hit when the ending is displayed, the notification effect may not be executed, or a small window image for the notification effect is displayed in a region different from the region where the ending is displayed. A notification effect may be executed. In addition, the mode of notification effect may be different between a big hit that the player can select and a big hit that cannot be selected by the player (a big hit under special conditions).

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, the presence / absence of the notification effect may be determined depending on whether the player is a big hit that is advantageous or unfavorable for the player. For example, in the case of a promising big hit that is advantageous to the player, the notification effect may be executed, and in the case of the normal big hit that is disadvantageous to the player, the notification effect may not be executed.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the game ball counted for the notification effect has been described as being paid out for the winning of the game ball. However, the number of difference balls obtained by subtracting the game balls that have been shot into the game area 24 and taken into the out port 26 from the game balls to be paid out may be used as the game balls that are counted for the notification effect. In order to do this, for example, a launch sensor may be provided at the launch position of the hit ball, and an out port sensor capable of counting game balls taken into the out port 26 may be provided. Then, it is only necessary to be able to count the number of difference balls by monitoring each winning sensor, launch sensor, and out port sensor including the big winning opening.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, in the gaming system configured to include the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the management server connected to the Internet network, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the management server are connected to the two-dimensional code reading function and the Internet network. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player's past game history and the effects selected by the player are selected by the player who owns the mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone). You may enable it to perform the game mode (mobile interlocking | linkage mode) in which a game can be performed in the game mode reflecting the mode (mode in which the character which appears is different). In such a case, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different depending on whether or not the mobile link mode is being executed. Moreover, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different depending on the type of mode selected by the player.

  (15) In the embodiment described above, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be made different by notification of different lotteries. Notification of different lottery means, for example, in a promotion effect that informs that a big hit will be a promising big hit during a big hit, a full announcement mode that announces the presence or absence of a probable change by a single announcement and a promising promotion by multiple announcements It is like a notification by a chance notification mode for notifying the presence or absence of the event. Such a difference in notification may be regarded as a difference in effect state, and the notification effect during a big hit may be different in the complete notification mode and the chance notification mode.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different due to the difference in the music flowing during the big hit. For example, you may make it the aspect of alerting | reporting effect differ by the case where the music of A is flowing, and the case where the music of B is flowing.

  (17) In the embodiment described above, the effect state (effect mode) may be changeable in a game state other than that during the big hit game. For example, the state of the notification effect during the next jackpot game may be changed by changing the effect state during the short-time state after the end of the jackpot game state.

  (18) In the various effects shown in the above-described embodiment, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player, and a stop button by the player When the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the operation of the display means, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, it may be applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. Is possible. In the slot machine, a bonus such as a big bonus (BB), a regular bonus (RB), an AT for performing an effect for notifying an internal lottery result, an RT in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is different from the normal gaming state, The notification effect as described above may be executed when the ART is controlled to be shifted to the AT and the RT. For example, when controlled by the AT, the mode can be selected from any mode of the production state, and when controlled to the first production state, the notification production by the first notification mode is executed and the second production is performed. When the state is controlled, a notification effect in the second notification mode may be executed.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the big hit gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, and a high base state.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 12 (the first production control board 12 and the second production control board 30), the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production device is mounted. 14 is provided, but a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the image display device 5 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the CPU 120 for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, one change pattern when starting the change. Although an example in which a command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. before reaching (so-called second if not reaching) A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode is transmitted before the stop, and the second command is the so-called second stop after reaching the reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the redrawing effect (if the reach is not reach) A command indicating the variation time and variation mode of (after) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 100, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and the specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control CPU 120. Also good. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced. Thus, in the configuration in which the variation pattern is notified to the effect control CPU 120 by two commands, the determination result of the display result by the effect process at the time of winning in the second command after transmitting the first command, and Alternatively, the prefetch determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the fact that the second command is received. Here, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo display that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous variation. Further, the slip refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a win has been described. You may employ | adopt the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which are examples of game media, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball launching operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

(23) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variation display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (24) In the embodiment described above, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described with a specific value exceeding 0% as a specific example. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of a predetermined game state 1 in a predetermined game period is compared with the occurrence ratio of another game state 2, and “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio” This includes the case where the percentage of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when the display result of the variation display is determined to be the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is unconditionally controlled to the probability variation state. An example of probability variation state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable prize ball device 7. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

  (26) It should be understood that the above-described embodiment is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described, but the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  For example, a game score for use in a game is given using the number of game values having a size specified by the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, and the given game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a score or a game score given by winning a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for deriving and displaying the display results. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  Further, for example, a game machine that uses game media is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and game media such as game balls can be used. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score when the conditions for giving the prize are satisfied.

  For example, based on the fact that there are probable big hits and normal big hits as jackpot types, and that the jackpot type was determined to be probable big hits, a gaming machine that is controlled to the probable state after the big hit game is shown. It is not limited. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after completion.

  Note that a sorting device is provided above the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and when the game ball passes through the sorting device, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B are alternately arranged. You may make it win.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of wagers are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. When a symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to a stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the predetermined effect such as the notice effect, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the game effect lamp, Various rendering operations including the lighting operation in the decoration LED can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  In the above description, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (effect control CPU 120) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., 1 Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, variation patterns may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. Is a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop, and the second command has reached a reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. May be configured to transmit a command indicating the variation time and variation mode after the so-called second stop.

  In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to the case where the ratio is different due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. : B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios such as 0%.

  Further, in the above embodiment, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after the big hit game based on the fact that there is a probable big hit or a normal big hit as the big hit type, and that the big hit type is determined to be a promising big hit. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus having a predetermined probability variation area inside is provided, and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball apparatus during the big hit game. The configuration shown in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after completion.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. Not limited. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed has been shown. Not limited to. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type may be derived and displayed last. There may be.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 11 stores a random value determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and variation category determination table), and is extracted from the main board 11 at the time of starting winning. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main board 11 refers to the random value determination table, and determines the random value determination process (determining whether or not to win, determining the variation category, and hitting the jackpot. In this case, the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined in the main board 11 and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this.

  For example, the random number determination table is stored in the effect control board 12 (first effect control board 12, second effect control board 30), and the effect control board 12 (first effect control board 12, second effect control board 30). The control board 30) receives the random number itself extracted from the main board 11 from the main board 11, executes a random value determination process by referring to the random value determination table based on the received random value, A pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the processing determination result. In other words, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12 (the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30).

  Further, the random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 (the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30). For example, the effect control board 12 (the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30) receives a part of the random number values and executes the determination process of the random value, and the determination determined in the main board 11 Results may be received. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 12 (the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30) receives the random number values (MR1 and MR2) and determines whether or not it is a big hit and the big hit. In some cases, determination of the type of jackpot may be performed, and the determination result of the variation category determined by the main board 11 based on the random value (MR3) may be received. That is, the effect control board 12 (the first effect control board 12 and the second effect control board 30) can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11. .

  Note that the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of the random numbers or by changing the update ranges of the random numbers.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Frame for gaming machines 4A ... First special symbol display device 4B ... Second special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball devices 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... First effect control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate Switch 22A ... 1st start port switch 22B ... 2nd start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... 2nd production control board 31 ... Display control part 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
First control means;
Second control means capable of communicating with the first control means;
Production state control means capable of controlling the production state in the advantageous state to any one of a plurality of types of production states;
Notification effect means for executing a notification effect related to the number of game media granted during the advantageous state;
With
The notification production means is
When the production state control means is controlled to the first production state, the notification production by the first notification mode is executed,
When the production state control unit is controlled to the second production state different from the first production state, the notification production by the second notification mode different from the first notification mode is executed,
The first control means includes
When a period during which predetermined communication with the second control unit cannot be performed exceeds a specific period, a specific signal is continuously supplied to the second control unit over a predetermined period.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images